Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 757 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 757. This building is inhabited below and above; the way up is by the campaniles, and in going up one has to use the platform, where the drums of the four domes are, and this platform has a parapet in front, and none of these domes communicate with the church, but they...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 165 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 165. Any shadow cast by a body in light and shade is of the same nature and character as that which is inseparable from the body. The centre of the length of a shadow always corresponds to that of the luminous body 72 . It is inevitable that every shadow must have its...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 50 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 343. Vitruvius' scheme of proportions.Vitruvius, the architect, says in his work on architecture that the measurements of the human body are distributed by Nature as follows: that is that 4 fingers make 1 palm, and 4 palms make 1 foot, 6 palms make 1 cubit; 4 cubits...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 804 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 804. Remember that to be certain of the point of origin of any muscle, you must pull the sinew from which the muscle springs in such a way as to see that muscle move, and where it is attached to the ligaments of the bones. NOTE. You will never get any thing but...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1526 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1526. On the morning of San Peter's day, June 29th, 1504, I took io ducats, of which I gave one to Tommaso my servant to spend. p. 458 On Monday morning 1 florin to Salai to spend on the house. On Thursday I took 1 florin for my own spending. Wednesday evening 1 fl...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 250 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 250. Propositions on perspective of disappearance from MS. C. (250-262).Of several bodies of equal size and equally distant from the eye, those will look the smallest which are against the lightest background. Every visible object must be surrounded by light and shade...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1043 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1043. Windows at Cesena. 567 FOOTNOTES 241:567 : There are four more lines of text which refer to a slightly sketched diagram.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 51 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 342. The torso from the front and back.The width of a man under the arms is the same as at the hips. A man's width across the hips is equal to the distance from the top of the hip to the bottom of the buttock, when a man stands p. 182 equally balanced on both feet;...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 805 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 805. p. 114 Which nerve causes the motion of the eye so that the motion of one eye moves the other? Of frowning the brows, of raising the brows, of lowering the brows,--of closing the eyes, of opening the eyes,--of raising the nostrils, of opening the lips, with...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 251 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 251. PERSPECTIVE. No visible object can be well understood and comprehended by the human eye excepting from the difference of the background against which the edges of the object terminate and by which they are bounded, and no object will appear [to stand out] separate...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 59 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 59. The whole surface of opaque bodies displays its whole image in all the illuminated atmosphere which surrounds them on all sides.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 420. Light on Branches and Leaves (420--422).That part of the body will be most illuminated which is hit by the luminous ray coming between right angles. 215 FOOTNOTES 215:215 : See Pl. XXVIII, No. 1.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1399 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1399. Arrigo is to have 11 gold Ducats. Arrigo is to have 4 gold ducats in the middle of August.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1438 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1438. [Lactantius], [the book of Benozzo], groups, to bind the book,--a lantern,--Ser Pecantino,--Pandolfino.--[Rosso]--a square, --small knives,--carriages,--curry combs-- cup.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 938 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 938. OF THE EARTH. The great elevations of the peaks of the mountains above the sphere of the water may have resulted from this that: a very large portion of the earth which was filled with water that is to say the vast cavern inside the earth may have fallen in a vast...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 58 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 58. PERSPECTIVE. The Production of pyramid of Vision (58-60).The instant the atmosphere is illuminated it will be filled with an infinite number of images which are produced by the various bodies and colours assembled in it. And the eye is the target, a loadstone...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 183 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 183. Further complications in the derived shadows (183-187).The greatest depth of shadow is in the simple derived shadow because it is not lighted by either of the two lights "a b, c d". The next less deep shadow is the derived shadow "e f n"; and in this the shadow is...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 421. Young plants have more transparent leaves and a more lustrous bark than old ones; and particularly the walnut is lighter coloured in May than in September.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1055 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1055. Alessandria in Piedmont (1055. 1056).At Candia in Lombardy, near Alessandria della Paglia, in making a well for Messer Gualtieri 574 of Candia, the skeleton of a very large boat was found about 10 braccia underground; and as the timber was black and fine, it...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1439 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1439. Quadrant of Carlo Marmocchi,--Messer Francesco Araldo,--Ser Benedetto d'Accie perello,--Benedetto on arithmetic,--Maestro Paulo, physician,--Domenico di Michelino,-- ...... of the Alberti,--Messer Giovanni Argimboldi.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 939 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 939. THE FIGURES OF THE ELEMENTS. The theory of Plato.Of the figures of the elements; and first as against those who deny the opinions of Plato, and who say that if the elements include one another in the forms attributed to them by Plato they would cause a vacuum one...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 182 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 182. p. 102 OF THE SHADOW CAST BY A BODY PLACED BETWEEN 2 EQUAL LIGHTS. The effect of light at different distances.A body placed between 2 equal lights will cast 2 shadows of itself in the direction of the lines of the 2 lights; and if you move this body placing it...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 408. The forms of trees (408--411).The elm always gives a greater length to the last branches of the year's growth than to the lower ones; and Nature does this because the highest branches are those which have to add to the size of the tree; and those at the bottom must...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 678. When Pluto's Paradise is opened, then there may be devils placed in twelve pots like openings into hell. Here will be Death, the Furies, ashes, many naked children weeping; living fires made of various colours....
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1348. Most Illustrious and most Reverend Lord. The Lord Ippolito, Cardinal of Este at Ferrare. Most Illustrious and most Reverend Lord. I arrived from Milan but a few days since and finding that my elder brother refuses to 682 p. 403 carry into effect a will, made three...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1243 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1243. THE LION. This animal, with his thundering roar, rouses his young the third day after they are born, teaching them the use of all their dormant senses and all the wild things which are in the wood flee away. This may be compared to the children of Virtue who are...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 195 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 195. What is the cause which makes the outlines of the shadow vague and confused? Whether it is possible to give clear and definite outlines to the edges of shadows.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 749 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 749. 30 braccia wide on each side; the lower entrance leads into a hall 10 braccia wide and 30 braccia long with 4 recesses each with a chimney. 361 FOOTNOTES 34:361 : On each side of the castle, Pl. LXXXII. No. 2 there are drawings of details, to the left "Camino"...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 172 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 172. When the light of the atmosphere is restricted [by an opening] and illuminates bodies which cast shadows, these bodies being equally distant from the centre of the window, that which is most obliquely placed will cast the largest shadow beyond it.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 522 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 522. OF DRAWING AN OBJECT. When you draw take care to set up a principal line which you must observe all throughout the object you are drawing; every thing should bear relation to the direction of this principal line.
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1127. p. 280 Of mining.If you want to know where a mine runs, place a drum over all the places where you suspect that it is being made, and upon this drum put a couple of dice, and when you are over the spot where they are mining, the dice will jump a little on the drum...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 46 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 46. The point, being indivisible, occupies no space. That which occupies no space is nothing. The limiting surface of one thing is the beginning of another. 2. That which is no part of any body is called nothing. 1. That which has no limitations, has no form...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 44 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1187. That man is of supreme folly who always wants for fear of wanting; and his life flies away while he is still hoping to enjoy the good things which he has with extreme labour acquired.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 46 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 347. "a b c" are equal to each other and to the foot and to the space between the nipple and the navel "d e" will be the third part of the whole man. "f g" is the fourth part of a man and is equal to "g h" and measures a cubit. 166 FOOTNOTES 183:166 : See Pl. XIX, No. 1...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 25 II. LINEAR PERSPECTIVE. We see clearly from the concluding sentence of section 49, where the author directly addresses the painter, that he must certainly have intended to include the elements of mathematics in his Book on the art of Painting. They are therefore...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 927 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 927. Water gives the first impetus to its motion. A book of the levelling of waters by various means, A book of diverting rivers from places where they do mischief. A book of guiding rivers which occupy too much ground. A book of parting rivers into several branches...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1427 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1427. The structure of the drawbridge shown me by Donnino, and why "c" and "d" thrust downwards. 748 FOOTNOTES 430:748 : The sketch on the same page as this text represents two poles one across the other. At the ends of the longest are the letter "c" and "d". The sense...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 812 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 812. ANATOMY. The divisions of the head (812. 813).There are eleven elementary tissues:-- Cartilage, bones, nerves, veins, arteries, fascia, ligament and sinews, skin, muscle and fat. OF THE HEAD. The divisions of the head are 10, viz. 5 external and 5 internal...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 661 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 661. That the first drawing was a simple line drawn round the shadow of a man cast by the sun on a wall.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 246 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 246. An opaque body will appear smaller when it is surrounded by a highly luminous background, and a light body will appear larger when it is seen against a darker background. This may be seen in the height of buildings at night, when lightning flashes behind them; it...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1530 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1530. Saturday the 2nd day of March I had from Santa Maria Novella 5 gold ducats, leaving 450. Of these I gave 2 the same day to Salai, who had lent them to me. 850 published by G. UZIELLI, Ricerche intorno a Leonardo da Vinci, Firenze, 1872, pp. 164, 165, 218 and 219...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1120. p. 278 Just as on a frozen river a man may run without moving his feet, so a car might be made that would slide by itself. 624 FOOTNOTES 278:624 : The drawings of carts by the side of this text have no direct connection with the problem as stated in words...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 51 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 51. IN WHAT WAY THE EYE SEES OBJECTS PLACED IN FRONT OF IT. The perception of the object depends on the direction of the eye. Supposing that the ball figured above is the ball of the eye and let the small portion of the ball which is cut off by the line "s t" p. 31 be...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 53 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1190. p. 297 We ought not to desire the impossible. 640 FOOTNOTES 297:640 : The writing of this note, which is exceedingly minute, is reproduced in facsimile on Pl. XLI No. 5 above the first diagram.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 930 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 930. p. 180 I. OF THE NATURE OF WATER. THE ORDER OF THE FIRST BOOK ON WATER. The arrangement of Book I.Define first what is meant by height and depth; also how the elements are situated one inside another. Then, what is meant by solid weight and by liquid weight; but...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1430 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1430. p. 431 Alberto da Imola;--Algebra, that is, the demonstration of the equality of one thing to another.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1001 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1001. p. 227 I. ITALY. CANAL OF FLORENCE. Canals in connection with the Arno (1001-1008).Sluices should be made in the valley of la Chiana at Arezzo, so that when, in the summer, the Arno lacks water, the canal may not remain dry: and let this canal be 20 braccia wide...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 299. OF THE MODE OF TREATING REMOTE OBJECTS IN PAINTING. It is easy to perceive that the atmosphere which lies closest to the level ground is denser p. 161 than the rest, and that where it is higher up, it is rarer and more transparent. The lower portions of large...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1390 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1390. p. 424 A nun lives at La Colomba at Cremona; she works good straw plait, and a friar of Saint Francis. 719 FOOTNOTES 424:719 : La Colomba is to this day the name of a small house at Cremona, decorated with frescoes.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 440. ON PAINTING. In the position of the eye which sees that portion of a tree illuminated which turns towards the light, one tree will never be seen to be illuminated equally with the other. To prove this, let the eye be "c" which sees p. 222 the two trees "b d" which...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 36 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 28. p. 21 The motion of a spectator who sees an object at rest often makes it seem as though the object at rest had acquired the motion of the moving body, while the moving person appears to be at rest. ON PAINTING. Objects in relief, when seen from a short distance...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1300 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1300. Human beings will be seen who will not understand each other's speech; that is, a German with a Turk. Fathers will be seen giving their daughters into the power of man and giving up all their former care in guarding them. (When Girls are married.) Men will come...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1159. p. 290 Any one who in discussion relies upon authority uses, not his understanding, but rather his memory. Good culture is born of a good disposition; and since the cause is more to be praised than the effect, I will rather praise a good disposition without...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 665. p. 346 Notes on the Last Supper (665-668).One who was drinking and has left the glass in its position and turned his head towards the speaker. Another, twisting the fingers of his hands together turns with stern brows to his companion . Another with his hands...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 258 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 258. p. 138 Of several objects equal in size, brightness of background and length that which has the flattest surface will look the largest. A bar of iron equally thick throughout and of which half is red hot, affords an example, for the red hot part looks thicker th...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1357. I know one who, having promised me much, less than my due, being disappointed of his presumptuous desires, has tried to deprive me of all my friends; and as he has found them wise and not pliable to his will, he has menaced me that, having found means...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1254 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1254. THE TIGER. This beast is a native of Hyrcania, and it is something like the panther from the various spots on its skin. It is an animal p. 330 of terrible swiftness; the hunter when he finds its young ones carries them off hastily, placing mirrors in the place...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 58 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 389. p. 200 On hair falling down in curls.Observe the motion of the surface of the water which resembles that of hair, and has two motions, of which one goes on with the flow of the surface, the other forms the lines of the eddies; thus the water forms eddying...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 126 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 126. p. 75 HOW THERE ARE 2 KINDS OF LIGHT, ONE SEPARABLE FROM, AND THE OTHER INSEPARABLE FROM BODIES. Of the various kinds of light (126, 127).Separate light is that which falls upon the body. Inseparable light is the side of the body that is illuminated by that light...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 535 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 535. WHY OF TWO OBJECTS OF EQUAL SIZE A PAINTED ONE WILL LOOK LARGER THAN A SOLID ONE. The reason of this is not so easy to demonstrate as many others. Still I will endeavour to accomplish it, if not wholly, at any rate in part. The perspective of diminuti...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 918 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 918. Divide an hour into 3000 parts, and this you can do with a clock by making the pendulum lighter or heavier.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 131 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 131. THE RAYS WHETHER SHADED OR LUMINOUS HAVE GREATER STRENGTH AND EFFECT AT THEIR POINTS THAN AT THEIR SIDES. Although the points of luminous pyramids may extend into shaded places and those of pyramids of shadow into illuminated places, and though among the luminous...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 486 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 486. OF DRAWING. The study of the antique (486. 487).Which is best, to draw from nature or from the antique? and which is more difficult to do outlines or light and shade?
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1108 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1108. The Dardanelles.In the Bosphorus the Black Sea flows always into the Egean sea, and the Egean sea never flows into it. And this is because the Caspian, which is 400 miles to the East, with the rivers which pour into it, always flows through subterranean caves...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 568 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 568. THE REASON WHY SMALL FIGURES SHOULD NOT BE MADE FINISHED. I say that the reason that objects appear diminished in size is because they are remote from the eye; this being the case it is evident that there must be a great extent of atmosphere between the eye...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1564 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1564. To remind your Excellency that Ridolfo Manini brought to Florence a quantity of crystal besides other stones such as are...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 846 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 846. Here nature appears with many animals to have been rather a cruel stepmother than a mother, and with others not a stepmother, but a most tender mother.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 324. Relative proportion of the hand and foot.The foot is as much longer than the hand as the thickness of the arm at the wrist where it is thinnest seen facing. Again, you will find that the foot is as much longer than the hand as the space between the inner angle...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 36. ON PERSPECTIVE. The eye which turns from a white object in the light of the sun and goes into a less fully lighted place will see everything as dark. And this happens either because the pupils of the eyes which have rested on this brilliantly lighted white object...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Iii : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 32 "III. CASTLES AND VILLAS." "A. CASTLES." Pl. LXXX, No. 1 (P. V. fol. 39b; No. d'ordre 2282). The fortified place here represented is said by Vallardi to be the "castello" at Milan, but without any satisfactory reason. The high tower behind the "rivellino...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 586 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 586. OF THE DELUSIONS WHICH ARISE IN JUDGING OF THE LIMBS. The selection of forms.A painter who has clumsy hands will paint similar hands in his works, and the same will occur with any limb, unless long study has taught him to avoid it. Therefore, O Painter, look...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 622 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 622. To make reddish black for flesh tints take red rock crystals from Rocca Nova or garnets and mix them a little; again armenian bole is good in part.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 491 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 491. WHAT RULES SHOULD BE GIVEN TO BOYS LEARNING TO PAINT. Industry and thoroughness the first conditions (491-493.)We know for certain that sight is one of the most rapid actions we can perform. In an instant we see an infinite number of forms, still we only take...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 964 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 964. The same cause which stirs the humours in every species of animal body and by which every injury is repaired, also moves the waters from the utmost depth of the sea to the greatest heights.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1464 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1464. 1511. On the 26th of September Antonio broke his leg; he must rest 40 days. 792 FOOTNOTES 440:792 : This note refers possibly to Beltraffio.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1132. p. 285 I. PHILOSOPHICAL MAXIMS. Prayers to God (1132. 1133).I obey Thee Lord, first for the love I ought, in all reason to bear Thee; secondly for that Thou canst shorten or prolong the lives of men.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 721 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 721. p. 15 There is to be seen, in the mountains of Parma and Piacenza, a multitude of shells and corals full of holes, still sticking to the rocks, and when I was at work on the great horse for Milan, a large sackful of them, which were found thereabout, was brought...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 851 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 851. Some notes on medicine (851-855).Make them give you the definition and remedies for the case... and you will see that men are selected to be doctors for diseases they do not know.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 331. "m n o" are equal. The narrowest width of the leg seen in front goes 8 times from the sole of the foot to the joint of the knee, and is the same width as the arm, seen in front at the wrist, and as the longest measure of the ear, and as the three chief divisions...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 777. p. 83 II. ON FISSURES IN NICHES. An arch constructed on a semicircle and bearing weights on the two opposite thirds of its curve will give way at five points of the curve. To prove this let the weights be at "n m" which will break the arch "a", "b", "f". I say th...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1016 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1016. Indicate the centre of Milan. Notes on buildings in Milan (1016-1019)Moforte--porta resa--porta nova--strada nova--navilio--porta cumana--barco--porta giovia--porta vercellina--porta sco Anbrogio--porta Tesinese--torre dell' Imperatore-- porta Lodovica--acqua. 543...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 498 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 498. On the productive power of minor artists (498-501).He is a poor disciple who does not excel his master.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 56 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 425. Although those leaves which have a polished surface are to a great extent of the same colour on the right side and on the reverse, it may happen that the side which is turned towards the atmosphere will have something of the colour of the atmosphere; and it will...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. Ii. Linear : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " II. LINEAR PERSPECTIVE Introduction 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 906 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 906. If you keep the details of the spots of the moon under observation you will often find great variation in them, and this I myself have proved by drawing them. And this is caused by the clouds that rise from the waters in the moon, which come between the sun...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 4. p. 12 The disorder in the MSS.Begun at Florence, in the house of Piero di Braccio Martelli, on the 22nd day of March 1508. And this is to be a collection without order, taken from many papers which I have copied here, hoping to arrange them later each in its place...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 728 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 728. OF TAKING CASTS OF MEDALS. A paste of emery mixed with aqua vitae, or iron filings with vinegar, or ashes of walnut leaves, or ashes of straw very finely powdered. 350 p. 19 The diameter is given in the lead enclosed; it is beaten with a hammer and several times...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 333 "X." "STUDIES AND SKETCHES FOR PICTURES AND DECORATIONS." An artist's manuscript notes can hardly be expected to contain any thing more than incidental references to those masterpieces of his work of which the fame, sounded in the writings of his contemporaries...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 983 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 983. OF THE SEA WHICH ENCIRCLES THE EARTH. I find that of old, the state of the earth was that its plains were all covered up and hidden by salt water. 519 FOOTNOTES 206:519 : This passage has already been published by Dr. M. JORDAN: Das Malerbuch des L. da Vinci...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1101 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1101. Rhodes (1101. 1102).In [fourteen hundred and] eighty nine there was an earthquake in the sea of Atalia near Rhodes, which opened the sea--that is its bottom--and into this opening such a torrent of water poured that for more than three hours the bottom of the se...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 138 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 138. p. 82 Every shadow cast by a body has a central line directed to a single point produced by the intersection of luminous lines in the middle of the opening and thickness of the window. The proposition stated above, is plainly seen by experiment. Thus if you draw...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 911 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 911. p. 169 VI. THE STARS. On the light of the stars (911-913).The stars are visible by night and not by day, because we are beneath the dense atmosphere, which is full of innumerable particles of moisture, each of which independently, when the rays of the sun fall up...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 561 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 561. p. 282 OF SHADOWS. Where a shadow ends in the light, note carefully where it is paler or deeper and where it is more or less indistinct towards the light; and, above all, in [painting] youthful figures I remind you not to make the shadow end like a stone, because...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1494 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1494. Mondino says that the muscles which raise the toes are in the outward side of the thigh, and he adds that there are no muscles in the back [upper side] of the feet, because nature desired to make them light, so as to move with ease; and if they had been fleshy...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 335. The relative proportions of the torso and of the leg (335. 336)."a b c" are equal to each other and to the space from the armpit of the shoulder to the genitals and to the distance from the tip of the fingers of the hand to the joint of the arm, and to the half...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 994 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 994. From the two lines of shells we are forced to say that the earth indignantly submerged under the sea and so the first layer was made; and then the deluge made the second. 529 FOOTNOTES 218:529 : This note is in the early writing of about 1470--1480. On the same...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1460 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1460. p. 440 1493. On the 1st day of November we settled accounts. Giulio had to pay 4 months; and Maestro Tommaso 9 months; Maestro Tommaso afterwards made 6 candlesticks, 10 days' work; Giulio some fire-tongs 15 days work. Then he worked for himself till the 27th May...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 960 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 960. In the West, near to Flanders, the sea rises and decreases every 6 hours about 20 braccia, and 22 when the moon is in its favour; but 20 braccia is the general rule, and this rule, as it is evident, cannot have the moon for its cause. This variation in the increase...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 626 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 626. Verdigris with aloes, or gall or turmeric makes a fine green and so it does with saffron or burnt orpiment; but I doubt whether in a short time they will not turn p. 319 black. Ultramarine blue and glass yellow mixed together make a beautiful green for fresco, th...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 725 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 725. THE MONUMENT TO MESSER GIOVANNI JACOMO DA TREVULZO. The project of the Trivulzio monument. Cost of the making and materials for the horse . 346 p. 16 A courser, as large as life, with the rider requires for the cost of the metal, duc. 500. And for cost of the ir...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1136. p. 286 In many cases one and the same thing is attracted by two strong forces, namely Necessity and Potency. Water falls in rain; the earth absorbs it from the necessity for moisture; and the sun evaporates it, not from necessity, but by its power.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 48 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 433. p. 219 OF DARK LEAVES IN FRONT OF TRANSPARENT ONES. When the leaves are interposed between the light and the eye, then that which is nearest to the eye will be the darkest, and the most distant will be the lightest, not being seen against the atmosphere; and this...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 591 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 591. p. 295 OF UNDULATING MOVEMENTS AND EQUIPOISE IN FIGURES AND OTHER ANIMALS. When representing a human figure or some graceful animal, be careful to avoid a wooden stiffness; that is to say make them move with equipoise and balance so as not to look like a piece...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 635 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 635. p. 322 VARNISH [OR POWDER]. On varnishes [or powders] (635-637).Take cypress [oil] and distil it and have a large pitcher, and put in the extract with so much water as may make it appear like amber, and cover it tightly so that none may evaporate. And when it is...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 582 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 582. How to represent the differences of age and sex (582-583).How the ages of man should be depicted: that is, Infancy, Childhood, Youth, Manhood, Old age, Decrepitude. 270 FOOTNOTES 291:270 : No answer is here given to this question, in the original MS.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 973 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 973. p. 202 When the fulness of rivers is diminished, then the acute angles formed at the junction of their branches become shorter at the sides and wider at the point; like the current "a n" and the current d n, which unite in "n" when the river is at its greatest...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1473 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1473. Anaxagoras: Every thing proceeds from every thing, and every thing becomes every thing, and every thing can be turned into every thing else, because that which exists in the elements is composed of those elements.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1170. Men are in error when they lament the flight of time, accusing it of being too swift, and not perceiving that it is sufficient as it passes; but good memory, with which nature has endowed us, causes things long past to seem present.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1309 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1309. p. 371 (Of Snakes, carried by Storks.) Serpents of great length will be seen at a great height in the air, fighting with birds. (Of great guns, which come out of a pit and a mould.) Creatures will come from underground which with their terrific noise will stun all...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 565 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 565. That you ought, when representing objects above the eye and on one side--if you wish them to look detached from the wall--to show, between the shadow on the object and the shadow it casts a middle light, so that the body will appear to stand away from the wall.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1008 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1008. p. 230 That the river which is to be turned from one place to another must be coaxed and not treated roughly or with violence; and to do this a sort of floodgate should be made in the river, and then lower down one in front of it and in like manner a third, fourth...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1105 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1105. Write to Bartolomeo the Turk as to the flow and ebb of the Black sea, and whether he is aware if there be such a flow and ebb in the Hyrcanean or Caspian sea. 613 FOOTNOTES 266:613 : The handwriting of this note points to a late date.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 987 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 987. OF THE DELUGE AND OF MARINE SHELLS. That marine shells could not go up the mountains. If you were to say that the shells which are to be seen within the confines of Italy now, in our days, far from the sea and at such heights, had been brought there by the deluge...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1487 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1487. Demetrius was wont to say that there was no difference between the speech and words of the foolish and ignorant, and the noises and rumblings of the wind in an inflated stomach. Nor did he say so without reason, for he saw no difference between the parts whence...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Vi : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 71 "VI. STUDIES OF ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS." Several of Leonardo's drawings of architectural details prove that, like other great masters of that period, he had devoted his attention to the study of the proportion of such details. As every organic being in nature h...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 328. Proportions of the leg (328-331).The greatest thickness of the calf of the leg is at a third of its height "a b", and is a twentieth part thicker than the greatest thickness of the foot. "a c" is half of the head, and equal to "d b" and to the insertion of the five...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 572 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 572. p. 288 OF A METHOD OF KEEPING IN MIND THE FORM OF A FACE. If you want to acquire facility for bearing in mind the expression of a face, first make yourself familiar with a variety of [forms of] several heads, eyes, noses, mouths, chins and cheeks and necks...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1112 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1112. p. 270 On the natives of hot countries.Men born in hot countries love the night because it refreshes them and have a horror of light because it burns them; and therefore they are of the colour of night, that is black. And in cold countries it is just the contrary...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 902 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 902. OF THE MOON. No solid body is less heavy than the atmosphere. 479 Explanation of the lumen cinereum in the moon.Having proved that the part of the moon that shines consists of water, which mirrors the body of the sun and reflects the radiance it receives from it;...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 990 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 990. That in the drifts, among one and another, there are still to be found the traces of the worms which crawled upon them when they were not yet dry. And all marine clays still contain shells, and the shells are petrified together with the clay. From their firmness...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1490 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1490. of in relation to the whole; and all their relations lie between these two extremes, and are called multiples.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1304 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1304. And those who feed on grass will turn night into day (Tallow.) And many creatures of land and water will go up among the stars ( that is Planets.) The dead will be seen carrying the living (in Carts and Ships in various places.) Food shall be taken out...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 638 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 638. On chemical materials (638-650).Note how aqua vitae absorbs into itself all the colours and smells of flowers. If you want to make blue put iris flowers into it and for red solanum berries (?)
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 45 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 436. OF A GENERALLY DISTRIBUTED LIGHT AS LIGHTING UP TREES. The proportions of light and shade in trees (436-440). That part of the trees will be seen to lie in the least dark shadow which is farthest from the earth. To prove it let "a p" be the tree, "n b c"...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 32. The pupil which is largest will see objects the largest. This is evident when we look at luminous bodies, and particularly at those in the sky. When the eye comes out of darkness and suddenly looks up at these bodies, they at first appear larger and then diminish;...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 915 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 915. On history of astronomy.Cicero says in [his book] De Divinatione that Astrology has been practised five hundred seventy thousand years before the Trojan war. 491 FOOTNOTES 171:491 : The statement that CICERO, "De Divin." ascribes the discovery of astrology...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1005 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1005. p. 229 The ruined wall is 640 braccia; 130 is the wall remaining with the mill; 300 braccia were broken in 4 years by Bisarno.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1560 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1560. Ut bene respondet Naturae ars docta! dedisset Vincius, ut tribuit cetera * sic animam * Noluit ut similis magis haec foret: altera sic est: Possidet illius Maurus amans animam. p. 467 Hujus quam cernis nomen Lucretia, Divi Omnia cui larga contribuere manu. Rar...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1477 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1477. p. 447 Aristotle, Book 3 of the Physics, and Albertus Magnus, and Thomas Aquinas and the others on the rebound of bodies, in the 7th on Physics, on heaven and earth.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 977 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 977. The origin of the sand in rivers (977. 978).A river that flows from mountains deposits a great quantity of large stones in its bed, which still have some of their angles and sides, and in the course of its flow it carries down smaller stones with the angles more...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 320. The distance between the centres of the pupils of the eyes is 1/3 of the face. The space between the outer corners of the eyes, p. 174 that is where the eye ends in the eye socket which contains it, thus the outer corners, is half the face. The greatest width...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 631 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 631. Since walnuts are enveloped in a thin rind, which partakes of the nature of..., if you do not remove it when you make the oil from them, this skin tinges the oil, and when you work with it this skin separates from the oil and rises to the surface of the painting...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 842 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 842. Lust is the cause of generation. Appetite is the support of life. Fear or timidity is the prolongation of life and preservation of its instruments.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 732 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 732. TO CAST BRONZE IN PLASTER. Take to every 2 cups of plaster 1 of ox-horns burnt, mix them together and make your cast with it.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 482 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 482. p. 243 I. MORAL PRECEPTS FOR THE STUDENT OF PAINTING. A WARNING CONCERNING YOUTHS WISHING TO BE PAINTERS. How to ascertain the dispositions for an artistic career.Many are they who have a taste and love for drawing, but no talent; and this will be discernible...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 595 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 595. OF THE DISPOSITION OF LIMBS. As regards the disposition of limbs in movement you will have to consider that when you wish to represent a man who, by some chance, has to turn backwards or to one side, you must not make him move his feet and all his limbs towards...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 122 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 122. OF THE NATURE OF SHADOW. Shadow partakes of the nature of universal matter. All such matters are more powerful in their beginning and grow weaker towards the end, I say at the beginning, whatever their form or condition may be and whether visible or invisible...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 855 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 855. To keep in health, this rule is wise: Eat only when you want and relish food. Chew thoroughly that it may do you good. Have it well cooked, unspiced and undisguised. He who takes medicine is ill advised. 439 FOOTNOTES 133:439 : This appears to be a sketch...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1499 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1499. p. 452 Theophrastus on the ebb and flow of the tide, and of eddies, and on water. 835 FOOTNOTES 452:835 : The Greek philosophers had no opportunity to study the phenomenon of the ebb and flow of the tide and none of them wrote about it. The movement of the waters...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 999 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 999. To know better the direction of the winds. 531 FOOTNOTES 220:531 : In connection with this text I may here mention a hygrometer, drawn and probably invented by Leonardo. A facsimile of this is given in Vol. I, p. 297 with the note: 'Modi di pesare l'arie eddi...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 495 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 495. OF WHETHER IT IS BETTER TO DRAW WITH COMPANIONS OR NOT. The distribution of time for studying (495-497).I say and insist that drawing in company is much better than alone, for many reasons. The first is that you would be ashamed to be seen behindhand among...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 526 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 526. p. 263 TO DRAW A FIGURE ON A WALL 12 BRACCIA HIGH WHICH SHALL LOOK 24 BRACCIA HIGH. If you wish to draw a figure or any other object to look 24 braccia high you must do it in this way. First, on the surface "m r" draw half the man you wish to represent; then...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 135 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 135. OF LIGHT AND LUSTRE. What is the difference between light and the lustre which is seen on the polished surface of opaque bodies? The lights which are produced from the polished surface of opaque bodies will be stationary on stationary objects even if the eye...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1344. I am greatly vexed to be in necessity, but I still more regret that this should be the cause of the hindrance of my wish which is always disposed to obey your Excellency. Perhaps your Excellency did not give further orders to Messer Gualtieri, believing that I had...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 674. p. 351 Allegorical representations (674--678).Above the helmet place a half globe, which is to signify our hemisphere, in the form of a world; on which let there be a peacock, richly decorated, and with his tail spread over the group; and every ornament belonging...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1247 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1247. it puts them aside with its trunk, so as not to trample them under foot; and it never hurts any thing unless when provoked. When one has fallen into a pit the others fill up the pit with branches, earth and stones, thus p. 327 raising the bottom that he may easily...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1313 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1313. (Of Kids.) The time of Herod will come again, for the little innocent children will be taken from their nurses, and will die of terrible wounds inflicted by cruel men.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 969 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 969. That many springs of salt water are found at great distances from the sea; this might happen because such springs pass through some mine of salt, like that in Hungary where salt is hewn out of vast caverns, just as stone is hewn. 511 FOOTNOTES 199:511 : The gre...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1469 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1469. Quotations and notes on books and authors (1469--1508). 1469 Book on Arithmetic,[ 1] 'Flowers of Virtue' , Pliny[ 2], 'Lives of the Philosophers', The Bible[ 3], 'Lapidary', 'On warfare'[ 4] 'Epistles of Filelfo', p. 443 The first decade, 'On the preservati...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 52 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 429. Never paint leaves transparent to the sun, because they are confused; and this is because on the transparency of one leaf will be seen the shadow of another leaf which is above it. This shadow has a distinct outline and a certain depth of shade and sometimes is [...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 25 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 39. The eye--which sees all objects reversed--retains the images for some time. This conclusion is proved by the results; because, the eye having gazed at light retains some impression of it. After looking (at it) there remain in the eye images of intense brightness...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1383 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1383. ... at Pistoja, Fioravante di Domenico at Florence is my most beloved friend, as though he were my [brother]. 713 FOOTNOTES 422:713 : On the same sheet is the text No. 663.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1058 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1058. That there are springs which suddenly break forth in earthquakes or other convulsions and suddenly fail; and this happened in a mountain in Savoy where certain forests sank in and left a very deep gap, and about four miles from here the earth opened itself like...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1012 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1012. From the beginning of the canal to the mill. From the beginning of the canal of Brivio to the mill of Travaglia is 2794 trabochi, that is 11176 braccia, which is more than 3 miles and two thirds; and here the canal is 57 braccia higher than the surface p. 232...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 25 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 772. p. 79 OF CRACKS IN WALLS, WHICH ARE WIDE AT THE BOTTOM AND NARROW AT THE TOP AND OF THEIR CAUSES. That wall which does not dry uniformly in an equal time, always cracks. A wall though of equal thickness will not dry with equal quickness if it is not everywhere...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 198 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 198. OF MODIFIED SHADOWS. Effects on cast shadows by the tone of the back ground.Modified shadows are those which are cast on light walls or other illuminated objects. A shadow looks darkest against a light background. The outlines of a derived shadow will be clearer...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 40 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1177. On Mount Etna the words freeze in your mouth and you may make ice of them. 637 Just as iron rusts unless it is used, and water putrifies or, in cold, turns to ice, so our intellect spoils unless it is kept in use. You do ill if you praise, and still worse if you...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1394 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1394. Giuliano Trombetta,--Antonio di Ferrara, --Oil of.... 720 FOOTNOTES 424:720 : Near this text is the sketch of a head drawn in red chalk.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1423 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1423. The room in the tower of Vaneri. 746 FOOTNOTES 429:746 : This note is written inside the sketch of a plan of a house. On the same page is the date 1513 (see No. 1376).
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 405. The lowest branches of those trees which have large leaves and heavy fruits, such as nut-trees, fig-trees and the like, always droop towards the ground. The branches always originate above [in the axis of] the leaves.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XIV. ANATOMY, ZOOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY Introduction 796. 797. 798. 799. 800. 801. 802. 803. 804. 805. 806. 807. 808. 809. 810. 811. 812. 813. 814. 815. 816. 817. 818. 819. 820. 821. 822. 823. 824. 825. 826. 827. 828. 829. 830. 831. 832. 833. 834. 835. 836. 837. 838. 839. 840...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 42 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 42. The elements of perspective--Of the Point (42-46).All the problems of perspective are made clear by the five terms of mathematicians, which are:--the point, the line, the angle, the superficies and the solid. The point is unique of its kind. And the point h...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1259 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1259. trochilus, a very small bird, runs at once to its mouth and hops among its teeth and goes pecking out the remains of the food, and so inciting it with voluptuous delight tempts it to open the whole of its mouth, and so it sleeps. This being observed by...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 55 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 392. You ought not to give to drapery a great confusion of many folds, but rather only introduce them where they are held by the hands or the arms; the rest you may let fall simply where it is its nature to flow; and do not let the nude forms be broken by too many...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 57 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1198. We are deceived by promises and time disappoints us... 641 FOOTNOTES 298:641 2: The rest of this passage may be rendered in various ways, but none of them give a satisfactory meaning.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1523 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1523. p. 457 Salai's cloak, the 4th of April 1497. 4 braccia of silver cloth l. 15 S 4 green velvet to trim it l. 9 S -- binding l.-- S 9 loops l.-- S 12 the making l. 1 S 5 binding for the front l.-- S 5 stitching here are 13 grossoni of his l. 26 S 5 Salai stole...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 255 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 255. If several luminous bodies are seen from a great distance although they are really separate they will appear united as one body.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1352. I was so greatly rejoiced, most Illustrious Lord, by the wished for recovery of your health, that my own ills have almost left me; and I say God be praised for it. But it vexes me greatly that I have not been able completely to satisfy your Excellency's wishes by...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1434 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1434. Have Avicenna's work on useful inventions translated; spectacles with the case, steel and fork and...., charcoal, boards, and paper, and chalk and white, and wax;.... .... for glass, a saw for bones with fine teeth, a chisel, inkstand........ three herbs...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 934 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 934. p. 182 OF THE CENTRE OF THE OCEAN. The centre of the sphere of waters is the true centre of the globe of our world, which is composed of water and earth, having the shape of a sphere. But, if you want to find the centre of the element of the earth, this is placed...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 55 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 55. p. 34 ELEMENTS OF PERSPECTIVE. All objects transmit their image to the eye in pyramids, and the nearer to the eye these pyramids are intersected the smaller will the image appear of the objects which cause them. Therefore, you may intersect the pyramid with...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1116. p. 276 If you want to build an armada for the sea employ these ships to ram in the enemy's ships. That is, make ships 100 feet long and 8 feet wide, but arranged so that the left hand rowers may have their oars to the right side of the ship, and the right h...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 531 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 531. p. 266 OF A METHOD OF LEARNING WELL BY HEART. On the management of works (531. 532).When you want to know a thing you have studied in your memory proceed in this way: When you have drawn the same thing so many times that you think you know it by heart, test it by...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 538 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 538. OF PLACING A FIGURE IN THE FOREGROUND OF A HISTORICAL PICTURE. The apparent size of figures in a picture (538-539)You must make the foremost figure in the picture less than the size of nature in proportion to the number of braccia at which you place it...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 753 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 753. p. 36 "IV. ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE." "A. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS." A building should always be detached on all sides so that its form may be seen. 363 FOOTNOTES 36:363 : The original text is reproduced on Pl. XCII, No. 1 to the left hand at the bottom.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 168 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 168. Both the primary and derived shadow will be larger when caused by the light of a candle than by diffused light. The difference between the larger and smaller shadows will be in inverse proportion to the larger and smaller lights causing them. 74 FOOTNOTES 95:74 :...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 161 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 161. OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS. The simple derived shadow is of two kinds: one kind which has its length defined, and two kinds which are undefined; and the defined shadow is pyramidal. Of the two undefined, one is a column and the other spreads out; and all three have...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 669. p. 348 On the battle of Anghiari. Florentine Neri di Gino Capponi Bernardetto de' Medici Micheletto, Niccolo da Pisa Conte Francesco Pietro Gian Paolo Guelfo Orsino, Messer Rinaldo degli Albizzi Begin with the address of Niccolo Piccinino to the soldiers...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 186 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 186. Why the intersections at "n" being composed of two compound derived shadows, p. 105 forms a compound shadow and not a simple one, as happens with other intersections of compound shadows. This occurs, according to the 2nd [diagram] of this [prop.] which says:...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1250 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1250. one which had inside it a boy, entire, that it had swallowed. THE MACLI.--CAUGHT WHEN ASLEEP. This beast is born in Scandinavia. It has the shape of a great horse, excepting that the great length of its neck and of its ears make a difference. It feeds on grass...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 808 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 808. Give the anatomy of the leg up to the hip, in all views and in every action and in p. 115 every state; veins, arteries, nerves, sinews and muscles, skin and bones; then the bones in sections to show the thickness of the bones. 420 FOOTNOTES 115:420 : A straightened...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 417. You will see in the lower branches of the elder, which puts forth leaves two and two placed crosswise [at right angles] one above another, that if the stem rises straight up towards the sky this order never fails; and its largest leaves are on the thickest part...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 191 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 191. p. 108 A shadow is never seen as of uniform depth on the surface which intercepts it unless every portion of that surface is equidistant from the luminous body. This is proved by the 7th which says:--The shadow will appear lighter or stronger as it is surrounded by...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1124. p. 279 TO ESCAPE THE PERIL OF DESTRUCTION. Destruction to such a machine may occur in two ways; of which the first is the breaking of the machine. The second would be when the machine should turn on its edge or nearly on its edge, because it ought always...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1046 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1046. In Romagna, the realm of all stupidity, vehicles with four wheels are used, of which the two in front are small and two high ones are behind; an arrangement which is very unfavourable to the motion, because on the fore wheels more weight is laid than on those...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 412. OF THE INSERTION OF THE BRANCHES ON PLANTS. The insertion of the leaves (412--419). Such as the growth of the ramification of plants is on their principal branches, so is that of the leaves on the shoots of the same plant. These leaves have 207 four modes...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 190 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 190. If a window "a b" admits the sunlight into a room, the sunlight will magnify the size of the window and diminish the shadow of a man in such a way as that when the man makes that dim shadow of himself, approach to that which defines the real size of the window, he...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 48 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1182. Blind ignorance misleads us thus and delights with the results of lascivious joys. Because it does not know the true light. Because it does not know what is the true light. Vain splendour takes from us the power of being.... behold! for its vain splendour we go...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1123. Remember that your flying machine must imitate no other than the bat, because the web is what by its union gives the armour, or strength to the wings. If you imitate the wings of feathered birds, you will find a much stronger structure, because they are pervious;...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 857 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 857. p. 137 I. THE EARTH AS A PLANET. The earth's place in the universe (857. 858).The equator, the line of the horizon, the ecliptic, the meridian: These lines are those which in all their parts are equidistant from the centre of the globe.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 413. p. 212 A DESCRIPTION OF THE ELM. The ramification of the elm has the largest branch at the top. The first and the last but one are smaller, when the main trunk is straight. The space between the insertion of one leaf to the rest is half the extreme length...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 295. OF AERIAL PERSPECTIVE. The rules of aerial perspective (295--297).There is another kind of perspective which I call Aerial Perspective, because by the atmosphere we are able to distinguish the variations in distance of different buildings, which appear placed...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1051 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1051. p. 243 Imola as regards Bologna is five points from the West towards the North West at a distance of 20 miles. Castel San Pietro lies exactly North West of Imola, at a distance of 7 miles. Faenza, as regards Imola lies exactly half way between the East and South...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 816 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 816. p. 118 II. ZOOLOGY AND COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. The divisions of the animal kingdom (816. 817)."Man". The description of man, which includes that of such creatures as are of almost the same species, as Apes, Monkeys and the like, which are many, "The Lion" and its...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 42 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 341. The width of the shoulders is 1/4 of the whole. From the joint of the shoulder to the hand is 1/3, from the parting of the lips to below the shoulder-blade is one foot. The greatest thickness of a man from the breast to the spine is one 8th of his height and is...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1534 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1534. p. 460 To Salai S 42 2 dozen of laces S 8 for papers S 3 d 8 a pair of shoes S 14 for velvet S 14 a sword and knife S 21 to the barber S 11 to Paolo for a.... S 20 For having his fortune told S 6
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 242 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 242. A dark object seen against a bright background will appear smaller than it is. A light object will look larger when it is seen against a background darker than itself.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1050 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1050. Imola, as regards Bologna, is five points from the West, towards the North West, at a distance of 20 miles. Castel San Piero is seen from Imola at four points from the West towards the North West, at a distance of 7 miles. Faenza stands with regard to Imol...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 294. HOW A PAINTER SHOULD CARRY OUT THE PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR IN PRACTICE. The practice of the prospettiva de colori.In order to put into practice this perspective of the variation and loss or diminution of the essential character of colours, observe at every hundred...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 817 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 817. Describe the various forms of the intestines of the human species, of apes and such like. Then, in what way the leonine species differ, and then the bovine, and finally birds; and arrange this description after the manner of a disquisition. Miscellaneous notes...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 43 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 340. From the chin to the roots of the hair is 1/10 of the whole figure. From the joint of the palm of the hand to the tip of the longest finger is 1/10. From the chin to the top of the head 1/8; and from the pit of the stomach to the top of the breast is 1/6...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 243 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 243. OF LIGHT. A luminous body when obscured by a dense atmosphere will appear smaller; as may be seen by the moon or sun veiled by mists. OF LIGHT. Of several luminous bodies of equal size and brilliancy and at an equal distance, that will look the largest which is...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1535 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1535. On Friday morning, one florin to Salai to spend; 3 soldi received bread S.. d wine S.. d grapes S.. d mushrooms S.. d fruit S.. d 852 bran S.. d at the barber's S.. d for shoes S.. d FOOTNOTES 460:852 6: Compare Nos. 1545, l. 4 and 5, with similar entries...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 744 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 744. ON MOVING HOUSES. Let the houses be moved and arranged in order; and this will be done with facility p. 29 because such houses are at first made in pieces on the open places, and can then be fitted together with their timbers in the site where they are to be...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 176 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 176. HOW SHADOWS FADE AWAY AT LONG DISTANCES. Shadows fade and are lost at long distances because the larger quantity of illuminated air which lies between the eye and the object seen tints the shadow with its own colour.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 745 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 745. The front "a m" will give light to the rooms; "a e" will be 6 braccia--"a b" 8 braccia --"b e" 30 braccia, in order that the rooms under the porticoes may be lighted; "c d f" is the place where the boats come to the houses to be unloaded. In order to render this...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 177 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 177. "a b" will be darker than "c d" in proportion as "c d" is broader than "a b". 80 FOOTNOTES 99:80 : In the original MS. the word "lume" (light) is written at the apex of the pyramid.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1395 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1395. Paul was snatched up to heaven. 721 FOOTNOTES 424:721 : See the facsimile of this note on Pl. XXIII No. 2.
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 302. When the smoke from dry wood is seen between the eye of the spectator and some dark space [or object], it will look blue. Thus the sky looks blue by reason of the darkness beyond it. And if you look towards the horizon of the sky, you will see the atmosphere p. 164...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 56 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1200. Just as courage imperils life, fear protects it. Threats alone are the weapons of the threatened man. Wherever good fortune enters, envy lays siege to the place and attacks it; and when it departs, sorrow and repentance remain behind. He who walks straight rarely...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1435 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1435. Undated memoranda (1435-1457).The book of Piero Crescenze,--studies from the nude by Giovanni Ambrosio,--compasses, --the book of Giovanni Giacomo.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 935 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 935. OF THE SEA WHICH CHANGES THE WEIGHT OF THE EARTH. The shells, oysters, and other similar animals, which originate in sea-mud, bear witness to the changes of the earth round the centre of our elements. This is proved thus: Great rivers always run turbid, being...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1115. On naval warfare (1115. 1116).Supposing in a battle between ships and galleys that the ships are victorious by reason of the high of heir tops, you must haul the yard up almost to the top of the mast, and at the extremity of the yard, that is the end which is...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 54 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 54. TO PROVE HOW OBJECTS REACH THE EYE. If you look at the sun or some other luminous body and then shut your eyes you will see it again inside your eye for a long time. This is evidence that images enter into the eye.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 530 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 530. OF JUDGING YOUR OWN PICTURES. We know very well that errors are better recognised in the works of others than in our own; and that often, while reproving little faults in others, you may ignore great ones in yourself. To avoid such ignorance, in the first place...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 169 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 169. ALL BODIES, IN PROPORTION AS THEY ARE NEARER TO, OR FARTHER FROM THE SOURCE OF LIGHT, WILL PRODUCE LONGER OR SHORTER DERIVED SHADOWS. Among bodies of equal size, that one which is illuminated by the largest light will have the shortest shadow. Experiment confirms...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 670. Allegorical representations referring to the duke of Milan (670-673). Ermine with blood Galeazzo, between calm weather and a representation of a tempest. 307 FOOTNOTES 349:307 : 670. Only the beginning of this text is legible; the writing is much effaced...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1251 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1251. THE BISON WHICH DOES INJURY IN ITS FLIGHT. This beast is a native of Paeonia and has a neck with a mane like a horse. In all its other parts it is like a bull, excepting that its horns are in a way bent inwards so that it cannot butt; hence it has no safety but...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 809 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 809. On corpulency and leanness (809-811).Make the rule and give the measurement of each muscle, and give the reasons of all their functions, and in which way they work and what makes them work then clothe it by degrees, one after the other, with each of its muscles...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 494 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 494. OF THE LIFE OF THE PAINTER IN HIS STUDIO. To the end that well-being of the body may not injure that of the mind, the painter or draughtsman must remain solitary, and particularly when intent on those studies and reflections which will constantly rise up before his...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 134 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 134. OF PAINTING. Heigh light or lustre on any object is not situated [necessarily] in the middle of an illuminated object, but moves as and where the eye moves in looking at it.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1312 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1312. p. 372 (Shoemakers.) Men will take pleasure in seeing their own work destroyed and injured.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 968 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 968. p. 199 IN CONFIRMATION OF WHY THE WATER GOES TO THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. I say that just as the natural heat of the blood in the veins keeps it in the head of man,--for when the man is dead the cold blood sinks to the lower parts--and when the sun is hot on the head...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 53 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 428. When one green has another [green] behind it, the lustre on the leaves and their transparent [lights] show more strongly than in those which are [seen] against the brightness of the atmosphere. And if the sun illuminates the leaves without their coming between it...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1. p. 11 I. GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK ON PAINTING The author's intention to publish his MSS.How by a certain machine many may stay some time under water. And how and wherefore I do not describe my method of remaining under water and how long I can remain without...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1013 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1013. If it be not reported there that this is to be a public canal, it will be necessary to pay for the land; 542 and the king will pay it by remitting the taxes for a year. FOOTNOTES 232:542 3: "il re". Louis XII or Francis I of France. It is hardly possible to doubt...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 773. p. 80 OF THE CAUSES OF FISSURES IN [THE WALLS OF] PUBLIC AND PRIVATE BUILDINGS. The walls give way in cracks, some of which are more or less vertical and others are oblique. The cracks which are in a vertical direction are caused by the joining of new walls, with...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 573 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 573. HOW YOU SHOULD SET TO WORK TO DRAW A HEAD OF WHICH ALL THE PARTS SHALL AGREE WITH THE POSITION GIVEN TO IT. To draw a head in which the features shall agree with the turn and bend of the head, pursue this method. You know that the eyes, eyebrows, nostrils, corners...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 991 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 991. p. 217 And if you choose to say that it was the deluge which carried these shells away from the sea for hundreds of miles, this cannot have happened, since that deluge was caused by rain; because rain naturally forces the rivers to rush towards the sea with all...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1491 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1491. Hippocrates says that the origin of men's sperm derives from the brain, and from the lungs and testicles of our parents, where the final decocture is made, and all the other limbs transmit their substance to this sperm by means of expiration, because there are no...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 914 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 914. p. 171 Observations on the stars.To see the real nature of the planets open the covering and note at the base 490 one single planet, and the reflected movement of this base will show the nature of the said planet; but arrange that the base may face only one...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. Xi : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XI. THE NOTES ON SCULPTURE Introduction 706. 707. 708. 709. 710. 711. 712. 713. 714. 715. 717. 718. 719. 720. 721. 722. 723. 724. 725. 726. 727. 728. 729. 730. 731. 732. 733. 734. 735. 736. 737. 738. 739. 740.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1476 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1476. If any man could have discovered the utmost powers of the cannon, in all its various forms and have given such a secret to the Romans, with what rapidity would they have conquered every country and have vanquished every army, and what reward could have been gre...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 976 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 976. p. 203 OF THE VIBRATION OF THE EARTH. On the alterations in the channels of rivers.The subterranean channels of waters, like those which exist between the air and the earth, are those which unceasingly wear away and deepen the beds of their currents.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 630 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 630. TO REMOVE THE SMELL OF OIL. Take the rank oil and put ten pints into a jar and make a mark on the jar at the height of the oil; then add to it a pint of vinegar and make it boil till the oil has sunk to the level of the mark and thus you will be certain th...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1149. Experience, the interpreter between formative nature and the human race, teaches how that nature acts among mortals; and being constrained by necessity cannot act otherwise than as reason, which is its helm, requires her to act.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 733 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 733. When you want to take a cast in wax, burn the scum with a candle, and the cast will come out without bubbles.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 594 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 594. OF REPRESENTING A MAN SPEAKING TO A MULTITUDE. When you wish to represent a man speaking to a number of people, consider the matter of which he has to treat and adapt p. 297 his action to the subject. Thus, if he speaks persuasively, let his action be appropriate...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 910 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 910. Construct glasses to see the moon magnified. 486 FOOTNOTES 168:486 : See the Introduction, p. 136, Fracastoro says in his work Homocentres: "Per dua specilla ocularla si quis perspiciat, alteri altero superposito, majora multo et propinquiora videbit omnia.--Qu...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1495 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1495. Of the error of those who practice without knowledge;-- See first the 'Ars poetica' of Horace . 830 FOOTNOTES 450:830 : A 3--5 are written on the margin at the side of the title line of the text given, entire as No. 19
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 995 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 995. p. 219 VII. ON THE ATMOSPHERE. Constituents of the atmosphere.That the brightness of the air is occasioned by the water which has dissolved itself in it into imperceptible molecules. These, being lighted by the sun from the opposite side, reflect the brightness...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 577 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 577. General suggestions for historical pictures (577-581).When you compose a historical picture take two points, one the point of sight, and the other the source of light; and make this as distant as possible.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 49 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 432. The willow and other similar trees, which have their boughs lopped every 3 or 4 years, put forth very straight branches, and their shadow is about the middle where these boughs spring; and towards the extreme ends they cast but little shade from having small leaves...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 590 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 590. OF THE MUSCLES OF ANIMALS. The hollow spaces interposed between the muscles must not be of such a character as that the skin should seem to cover two sticks laid side by side like "c", nor should they seem like two sticks somewhat remote from such contact so th...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 634 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 634. ... outside the bowl 2 fingers lower than the level of the oil, and pass it into the neck of a bottle and let it stand and thus all the oil will separate from this milky liquid; it will enter the bottle and be as clear as crystal; and grind your colours with this...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 972 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 972. On the alterations, caused in the courses of rivers by their confluence (972-974).When a smaller river pours its waters into a larger one, and that larger one flows from the opposite direction, the course of the smaller river will bend up against the approach...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1472 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1472. See 'On Ships' Messer Battista, and Frontinus 'On Acqueducts' 815 . 816 FOOTNOTES 445:815 2: 2. Vitruvius de Arch., et Frontinus de Aquedoctibus. Florence, l5l3.--This is the earliest edition of Frontinus.--The note referring to this author thus suggests...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 737 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 737. HOW CASTS OUGHT TO BE POLISHED. Make a bunch of iron wire as thick as thread, and scrub them with [this and] water; hold a bowl underneath that it may not make a mud below. HOW TO REMOVE THE ROUGH EDGES FROM BRONZE. Make an iron rod, after the manner of a large...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1142. The part always has a tendency to reunite with its whole in order to escape from its imperfection. The spirit desires to remain with its body, because, without the organic instruments of that body, it can neither act, nor feel anything.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1308 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1308. (Of the Shadow cast by a man at night with a light.) Huge figures will appear in human shape, and the nearer you get to them, the more will their immense size diminish. 664 FOOTNOTES 370:664 page 1307: It seems to me probable that this note, which occurs...
Vol. Ii. Title Page : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " Plate LXV THE NOTEBOOKS OF LEONARDO DA VINCI ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED AS THE LITERARY WORKS OF LEONARDO DA VINCI TRANSLATED BY JEAN PAUL RICHTER VOLUME II [1883] These files are based on material produced for Project Gutenberg by Distributed Proofing. Additional scanning...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1009 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1009. Canals in the Milanese (1009-1013).The canal of San Cristofano at Milan made May 3rd 1509. 539 FOOTNOTES 230:539 : This observation is written above a washed pen and ink drawing which has been published as Tav. VI in the "Saggio." The editors of that work expl...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 130 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 130. p. 77 FIRST BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. On the nature of light (130. 131).The reason by which we know that a light radiates from a single centre is this: We plainly see that a large light is often much broader than some small object which nevertheless--and although...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1109 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1109. p. 268 Constantinople.The bridge of Pera at Constantinople, 40 braccia wide, 70 braccia high above the water, 600 braccia long; that is 400 over the sea and 200 on the land, thus making its own abutments. 615 FOOTNOTES 268:615 : See Pl. CX No. 1. In 1453 by order...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 569 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 569. Whenever a figure is placed at a considerable distance you lose first the distinctness of the smallest parts; while the larger parts are left to the last, losing all distinctness of detail and outline; and what remains is an oval or spherical figure with confused...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1131. Of decorations.White and sky-blue cloths, woven in checks to make a decoration. Cloths with the threads drawn at "a b c d e f g h i k", to go round the decoration.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 490 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 490. OF STUDY AND THE ORDER OF STUDY. How to acquire practice.I say that first you ought to learn the limbs and their mechanism, and having this p. 246 knowledge, their actions should come next, according to the circumstances in which they occur in man. And thirdly...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 850 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 850. That the blood which returns when the heart opens again is not the same as that which closes the valves of the heart.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 332. On the central point of the whole body.In kneeling down a man will lose the fourth part of his height. When a man kneels down with his hands folded on his breast the navel will mark half his height and likewise the points of the elbows. Half the height of a man who...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 778. p. 84 ON THE SHRINKING OF DAMP BODIES OF DIFFERENT THICKNESS AND WIDTH. The window "a" is the cause of the crack at "b"; and this crack is increased by the pressure of "n" and "m" which sink or penetrate into the soil in which foundations are built more th...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1017 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1017. The moat of Milan. Canal 2 braccia wide. The castle with the moats full. The filling of the moats of the Castle of Milan.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 57 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 424. p. 216 A leaf with a concave surface seen from the under side and up-side-down will sometimes show itself as half in shade, and half transparent. Thus, if "o p" is the leaf and the light "m" and the eye "n", this will see "o" in shadow because the light does not...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 5. Suggestions for the arrangement of MSS treating of particular subjects.(5-8).Of digging a canal. Put this in the Book of useful inventions and in proving them bring forward the propositions already proved. And this is the proper order; since if you wished to show...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1316 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1316. The goldfinch gives victuals to its caged young. Death rather than loss of liberty. 665 FOOTNOTES 374:665 : Above this text is another note, also referring to liberty; see No. 694.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 729 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 729. STUCCO. On stucco (729. 730).Place stucco over the prominence of the..... which may be composed of Venus and Mercury, and lay it well over that prominence of the thickness of the side of a knife, made with the ruler and cover this with the bell of a still, and you...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 50 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 50. Definition of Perspective.[Drawing is based upon perspective, which is nothing else than a thorough knowledge of the function of the eye. And this function simply p. 30 consists in receiving in a pyramid the forms and colours of all the objects placed before it. I...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1119. Diving apparatus and Skating (1119-1121).Of walking under water. Method of walking on water. 623 FOOTNOTES 277:623 : The two sketches belonging to this passage are given by AMORETTI, "Memorie Storiche". Tav. II, Fig. 3 and 4.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 52 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1191. Ask counsel of him who rules himself well. Justice requires power, insight, and will; and it resembles the queen-bee. He who does not punish evil commands it to be done. He who takes the snake by the tail will presently be bitten by it. The grave will fall in up...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 931 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 931. OF WHAT IS WATER. Definitions (931. 932).Among the four elements water is the second both in weight and in instability.
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 298. WHY THE ATMOSPHERE MUST BE REPRESENTED AS PALER TOWARDS THE LOWER PORTION. On the relative density of the atmosphere (298--290).Because the atmosphere is dense near the earth, and the higher it is the rarer it becomes. When the sun is in the East if you look...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1391 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1391. Needle,--Niccolao,--thread,--Ferrando, -lacopo Andrea,--canvas,--stone,--colours, -brushes,-pallet,-sponge,-the panel of the Duke.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 666. Another lays his hand on the table and is looking. Another blows his mouthful. Another leans forward to see the speaker shading his eyes with his hand. Another draws back behind the one who leans forward, and sees the speaker between the wall and the man who is...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 259 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 259. Of several bodies of equal size and length, and alike in form and in depth of shade, that will appear smallest which is surrounded by the most luminous background.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1356. Miscellaneous drafts of letters and personal records (1356--1368).All the ills that are or ever were, if they could be set to work by him, would not satisfy the desires of his iniquitous soul; and I could not in any length of time describe his nature to you, but I...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 59 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 388. Why an impetus is not spent at once [but diminishes] gradually in some one direction? 193 The impetus acquired in the line "a b c d" is spent in the line "d e" but not so completely but that some of its force remains in it and to this force is added the momentum...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1255 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1255. the same till he gets into his boat. CATOBLEPAS. It is found in Ethiopia near to the source Nigricapo. It is not a very large animal, is sluggish in all its parts, and its head is so large that it carries it with difficulty, in such wise that it always droops...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 534 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 534. WHY A PAINTING CAN NEVER APPEAR DETACHED AS NATURAL OBJECTS DO. Painters often fall into despair of imitating nature when they see their pictures fail in that relief and vividness which objects have that are seen in a mirror; while they allege that they have...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1054 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1054. p. 244 OF PAINTING. On the tops and sides of hills foreshorten the shape of the ground and its divisions, but give its proper shape to what is turned towards you. 573 FOOTNOTES 244:573 : This passage evidently refers to the making of maps, such as Pl. CXII, CXIII...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 409. In general almost all the upright portions of trees curve somewhat turning the convexity towards the South; and their branches are longer and thicker and more abundant towards the South than towards the North. And this occurs because the sun draws the sap towards...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 194 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 194. OF SHADOWS WHICH NEVER COME TO AN END. The greater the difference between a light and the body lighted by it, the light being the larger, the more vague will be the outlines of the shadow of that object. p. 109 The derived shadow will be most confused towards...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 741 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 741. The roads "m" are 6 braccia higher than the roads "p s", and each road must be 20 braccia wide and have 1/2 braccio slope from the sides towards the middle; and in the middle let there be at every braccio an opening, one braccio long and one finger wide, where...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 173 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 173. These bodies standing apart in a room lighted by a single window will have derivative shadows more or less short according as they are more or less opposite to the window. Among the shadows cast by bodies of equal mass but at unequal distances from the opening by...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 47 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 346. The hand from the longest finger to the wrist joint goes 4 times from the tip of the longest finger to the shoulder joint.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 813 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 813. "a". hair "n". skin "c". muscle "m". fascia "o". skull "i.e." bone "b". dura mater "d". pia mater "f". brain "r". pia mater, below "t". dura mater "l". rete mirablile "s". the occipitul bone. 422 FOOTNOTES 116:422 : See Pl. CVIII, No. 3.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1531 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1531. Thursday, the eighth day of June, I took 17 grossoni, 18 soldi; on the same Thursday in the morning I gave to Salai 22 soldi for the expenses.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 247 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 247. ON LIGHT BETWEEN SHADOWS When you are drawing any object, remember, in comparing the grades of light in the illuminated portions, that the eye is often deceived by seeing things lighter than they are. And the reason lies in our comparing those parts with...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1385 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1385. OF THE INSTRUMENT. Any one who spends one ducat may take the instrument; and he will not pay more than half a ducat as a premium to the inventor of the instrument and one grosso to the workman every year. I do not want sub-officials. 715 FOOTNOTES 423:715 : Refers...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 292. An exceptional case.Of the edges [outlines] of shadows. Some have misty and ill defined edges, others distinct ones. No opaque body can be devoid of light and shade, except it is in a mist, on ground covered with snow, or when snow is falling on the open country...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 925 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 925. A book of driving back armies by the force of a flood made by releasing waters. A book showing how the waters safely bring down timber cut in the mountains. A book of boats driven against the impetus of rivers. A book of raising large bridges higher. Simply by...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 46 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1184. Every man wishes to make money to give it to the doctors, destroyers of life; they then ought to be rich. 638 Man has much power of discourse which for the most part is vain and false; animals have but little, but it is useful and true, and a small truth is better...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 859 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 859. The fundamental laws of the solar system (859-864).Force arises from dearth or abundance; it is the child of physical motion, and the grand-child of spiritual motion, and the mother and origin of gravity. Gravity is limited to the elements of water and earth; but...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1125. Bags by which a man falling from a height of 6 braccia may avoid hurting himself, by a fall whether into water or on the ground; and these bags, strung together like a rosary, are to be fixed on one's back.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 44 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 44. p. 28 OF THE NATURAL POINT. The smallest natural point is larger than all mathematical points, and this is proved because the natural point has continuity, and any thing that is continuous is infinitely divisible; but the mathematical point is indivisible because it...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 520 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 520. OF SELECTING THE LIGHT WHICH GIVES MOST GRACE TO FACES. If you should have a court yard that you can at pleasure cover with a linen awning that light will be good. Or when you want to take a portrait do it in dull weather, or as evening falls, making the sitter...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 179 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 179. THE ACTION OF THE LIGHT AS FROM ITS CENTRE. If it were the whole of the light that caused the shadows beyond the bodies placed in front of it, it would follow that any body much smaller than the light would cast a pyramidal shadow; but experience not showing this...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1241 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1241. THE CROCODILE. HYPOCRISY. This animal catches a man and straightway kills him; after he is dead, it weeps for him with a lamentable voice and many tears. Then, having done lamenting, it cruelly devours him. It is thus with the hypocrite, who, for the smallest...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1350. Drafts of Letters to the Superintendent of Canals and to Fr. Melzi.Magnificent President, I am sending thither Salai, my pupil, who is the bearer of this, and from him you will hear by word of mouth the cause of my... p. 405 Magnificent President, I... Magnificent...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 180 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 180. A body in light and shade placed between two equal lights side by side will cast shadows in proportion to the [amount of] light. And the shadows will be one darker than the other in proportion as one light is nearer to the said body than the other on the opposite...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1113. p. 273 ON MOVEMENTS;--TO KNOW HOW MUCH A SHIP ADVANCES IN AN HOUR. The ship's logs of Vitruvius, of Alberti and of LeonardoThe ancients used various devices to ascertain the distance gone by a ship each hour, among which Vitruvius 617 gives one in his work...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 305. In the morning the mist is denser above than below, because the sun draws it upwards; hence tall buildings, even if the summit is at the same distance as the base have the summit invisible. Therefore, also, the sky looks darkest [in colour] overhead, and towards...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1040 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1040. p. 241 On St. Mary's day in the middle of August, at Cesena, 1502. 565 FOOTNOTES 241:565 : See Pl. CX, No. 4.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 253 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 253. The straight edges of a body will appear broken when they are conterminous with a dark space streaked with rays of light. 117 FOOTNOTES 137:117 : Here again the diagrams in the original have no connection with the text.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1525 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1525. Memorandum. That on the 8th day of April 1503, I, Leonardo da Vinci, lent to Vante, miniature painter 4 gold ducats, in gold. Salai carried them to him and gave them into his own hand, and he said he would repay within the space of 40 days. Memorandum. Th...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 53 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 338. The proportions of the whole figure (338-341).A man when he lies down is reduced to 1/9 of his height.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 807 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 807. Remove by degrees all the parts of the front of a man in making your dissection, till you come to the bones. Description of the parts of the bust and of their motions.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 167 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 167. p. 95 The cast shadow will be longest when the light is lowest. The cast shadow will be shortest when the light is highest.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 755 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 755. p. 37 It never looks well to see the roofs of a church; they should rather be flat and the water should run off by gutters made in the frieze. 366 FOOTNOTES 37:366 : This text is to the left of the domed church reproduced on Pl. LXXXVII, No. 2.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 563 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 563. OF THE BACKGROUND THAT THE PAINTER SHOULD ADOPT IN HIS WORKS. Since experience shows us that all bodies are surrounded by light and shade it is necessary that you, O Painter, should so arrange that the side which is in light shall terminate against a dark body...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 981 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 981. The summits of mountains for a long time rise constantly. The opposite sides of the mountains always approach each other below; the depths of the valleys which are above the sphere of the waters are in the course of time constantly getting nearer to the centre...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1481 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1481. On the increase of the Nile, a small book by Aristotle. 820 FOOTNOTES 447:820 : De inundatione Nili, is quoted here and by others as a work of Aristotle. The Greek original is lost, but a Latin version of the beginning exists (Arist. Opp. IV p. 213 ed. Did. Par.)...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1103 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1103. SITE FOR [A TEMPLE OF] VENUS. Cyprus (1103. 1104).You must make steps on four sides, by which to mount to a meadow formed by nature at the top of a rock which may be hollowed out and supported in front by pilasters and open underneath in a large portico, 612 p...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 904 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 904. OF THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. Others say that the moon is composed of more or less transparent parts; as though one part were something like alabaster and others like crystal or glass. It would follow from this that the sun casting its rays on the less transparent...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1134. The powers of Nature (1134-1139).O admirable impartiality of Thine, Thou first Mover; Thou hast not permitted that any force should fail of the order or quality of its necessary results.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 723 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 723. Of the horse I will say nothing because I know the times. 344 FOOTNOTES 15:344 : This passage occurs in a rough copy of a letter to Ludovico il Moro, without date (see below among the letters).
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1466 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1466. On the 3rd day of January. Benedetto carne on the 17th of October; he stayed with me two months and 13 days of last year 796 , in which time he earned 38 lire, 18 soldi and 8 dinari; he had of this 26 lire and 8 soldi, and there remains to be paid for the past...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 966 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 966. WHETHER WATER RISES FROM THE SEA TO THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. The water of the ocean cannot make its way from the bases to the tops of the mountains p. 198 which bound it, but only so much rises as the dryness of the mountain attracts. And if, on the contrary...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 584 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 584. p. 292 THAT A FIGURE IS NOT ADMIRABLE UNLESS IT EXPRESSES BY ITS ACTION THE PASSION OF ITS SENTIMENT. Of representing the emotions.That figure is most admirable which by its actions best expresses the passion that animates it. HOW AN ANGRY MAN IS TO BE FIGURED. You...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 844 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 844. King of the animals--as thou hast described him--I should rather say king of the beasts, thou being the greatest--because thou hast spared slaying them, in order that they may give thee their children for the benefit of the gullet, of which thou hast attempted...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 326. "a d" is a head's length, "c b" is a head's length. The four smaller toes are all equally thick from the nail at the top to the bottom, and are 1/13 of the foot. 142 FOOTNOTES 176:142 : See Pl. XIV, No. 1, a drawing of a foot with the text in three lines below it.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1566 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1566. Leonardo's Will.Be it known to all persons, present and to come that at the court of our Lord the King at Amboise before ourselves in person, Messer Leonardo da Vinci painter to the King, at present staying at the place known as Cloux near Amboise, duly...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 484 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 484. p. 244 OF THE ORDER OF LEARNING TO DRAW. First draw from drawings by good masters done from works of art and from nature, and not from memory; then from plastic work, with the guidance of the drawing done from it; and then from good natural models and this you must...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 105 "XIV." "ANATOMY, ZOOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY." Leonardo's eminent place in the history of medicine, as a pioneer in the sciences of Anatomy and Physiology, will never be appreciated till it is possible to publish the mass of manuscripts in which he largely treated...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 124 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 124. A simple shadow is one where no light at all interferes with it. A compound shadow is one which is somewhat illuminated by one or more lights.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 978 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 978. All the torrents of water flowing from the mountains to the sea carry with them the stones from the hills to the sea, and by the influx of the sea-water towards the mountains; these stones were thrown back towards the mountains, and as the waters rose and retired...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1478 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1478. Aristotle says that if a force can move a body a given distance in a given time, the same force will move half the same body twice as far in the same time.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1302 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1302. Men will deal bitter blows to that which is the cause of their life. (In thrashing Grain.) The skins of animals will rouse men from their silence with great outcries and curses. (Balls for playing Games.) Very often a thing that is itself broken is the occasi...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 34 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 30. The comparative size of the image depends on the amount of light (30-39).The eye will hold and retain in itself the image of a luminous body better than that of a shaded object. The reason is that the eye is in itself perfectly dark and since two things that are...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 43 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 438. OF TREES THAT ARE LIGHTED BY THE SUN AND BY THE ATMOSPHERE. In trees that are illuminated [both] by the sun and the atmosphere and that have leaves of a dark colour, one side will be illuminated by the atmosphere [only] and in consequence of this light will tend...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1003 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1003. By guiding the Arno above and below a treasure will be found in each acre of ground by whomsoever will.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 120 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 120. Shadow is the diminution of light by the intervention of an opaque body. Shadow is the counterpart of the luminous rays which are cut off by an opaque body. This is proved because the shadow cast is the same in shape and size as the luminous rays were which are...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 579 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 579. PRECEPTS IN PAINTING. Let you sketches of historical pictures be swift and the working out of the limbs not be carried too far, but limited to the position of the limbs, which you can afterwards finish as you please and at your leisure. 269 FOOTNOTES 290:269 : See...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 322. The great toe is the sixth part of the foot, taking the measure in profile, on the inside of the foot, from where this toe springs from the ball of the sole of the foot to its tip "a b"; and it is equal to the distance from the mouth to the bottom of the chin. If...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 840 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 840. Miscellaneous physiological observations (840-842).There are four Powers: memory and intellect, desire and covetousness. The two first are mental and the others sensual. The three senses: sight, hearing and smell cannot well be prevented; touch and taste not at all...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1007 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1007. The eddy made by the Mensola, when the Arno is low and the Mensola full. 537 FOOTNOTES 229:537 : "Mensola" is a mountain stream which falls into the Arno about a mile and a half above Florence. A=Arno, I=Isola, M=Mvgone, P=Pesa, N=Mesola.
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 34. Why when the eye has just seen the light, does the half light look dark to it, and in the same way if it turns from the darkness the half light look very bright?
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. E. Studies : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 60 E. STUDIES FOR THE CENTRAL TOWER, OR TIBURIO OF MILAN CATHEDRAL. Towards the end of the fifteenth century the Fabbricceria del Duomo had to settle on the choice of a model for the crowning and central part of this vast building. We learn from a notice published by...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 47 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 434. OF THE LIGHTS ON DARK LEAVES. The lights on such leaves which are darkest, will be most near to the colour of the atmosphere that is reflected in them. And the cause of this is that the light on the illuminated portion mingles with the dark hue to compose a blue...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 739 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 739. TO COMBINE LEAD WITH OTHER METAL. If you wish for economy in combining lead with the metal in order to lessen the amount of tin which is necessary in the metal, first alloy the lead with the tin and then add the molten copper. HOW TO MELT [METAL] IN A FURNACE...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1306 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1306. (Of Children who are suckled.) Many Franciscans, Dominicans and Benedictines will eat that which at other times was eaten by others, who for some months to come will not be able to speak. (Of Cockles and Sea Snails which are thrown up by the sea and which rot...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 900 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 900. p. 162 OF THE MOON. All my opponent's arguments to say that there is no water in the moon. 477 FOOTNOTES 162:477 : The objections are very minutely noted down in the manuscript, but they hardly seem to have a place here.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1107 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1107. The sea of Azov.Hence it follows that the sea of Azov is the highest part of the Mediterranean sea, being at a distance of 3500 miles from the Straits of Gibraltar, as is shown by the map for navigation; and it has 3500 braccia of descent, that is, one mile...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1485 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1485. Cleomedes the philosopher. 823 FOOTNOTES 448:823 : Cleomede. A Greek mathematician of the IVth century B. C. We have a Cyclic theory of Meteorica by him. His works were not published before Leonardo's death.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 985 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 985. p. 208 VI. GEOLOGICAL PROBLEMS. In this work you have first to prove that the shells at a thousand braccia of elevation were not carried there by the deluge, because they are seen to be all at one level, and many mountains are seen to be above that level;...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 567 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 567. WHY FACES [SEEN] AT A DISTANCE LOOK DARK. The methods of aerial (567--570).We see quite plainly that all the images of visible objects that lie before us, whether large or small, reach our sense by the minute aperture of the eye; and if, through so small a passage...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 59 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 422. OF THE ACCIDENTS OF COLOURING IN TREES. The accidents of colour in the foliage of trees are 4. That is: shadow, light, lustre [reflected light] and transparency. OF THE VISIBILITY OF THESE ACCIDENTS. These accidents of colour in the foliage of trees become confused...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1318 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1318. All those things which in winter are hidden under the snow, will be uncovered and laid bare in summer. (for Falsehood, which cannot remain hidden).
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 727 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 727. POWDER FOR MEDALS. On the coining of medals (727. 728).The incombustible growth of soot on wicks reduced to powder, burnt tin and all the metals, alum, isinglass, smoke from a brass forge, each ingredient to be moistened, with aqua vitae or malmsey or strong malt...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 962 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 962. This is meant to represent the earth cut through in the middle, showing the depths of the sea and of the earth; the waters start from the bottom of the seas, and ramifying through the earth they rise to the summits of the mountains, flowing back by the rivers...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 624 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 624. THE PROPORTIONS OF COLOURS. If one ounce of black mixed with one ounce of white gives a certain shade of darkness, what shade of darkness will be produced by 2 ounces of black to 1 ounce of white?
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1019 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1019. p. 234 In the Cathedral at the pulley of the nail of the cross. Item. To place the mass "v r" in the... 545 FOOTNOTES 234:545 : On this passage AMORETTI remarks "(Memorie Storiche" chap. IX): Nell'anno stesso lo veggiamo formare un congegno di carucole e di corde...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1044 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1044. At Porto Cesenatico, on the 6th of September 1502 at 9 o'clock a. m. The way in which bastions ought to project beyond the walls of the towers to defend the outer talus; so that they may not be taken by artillery. 568 FOOTNOTES 241:568 : An indistinct sketch...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 419. p. 215 Every shoot and every fruit is produced above the insertion [in the axil] of its leaf which serves it as a mother, giving it water from the rain and moisture from the dew which falls at night from above, and often it protects them against the too great he...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 220 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 220. A body on which the solar rays fall between the thin branches of trees far apart will cast but a single shadow. If an opaque body and a luminous one are (both) spherical the base of the pyramid of rays will bear the same proportion to the luminous body as the base...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 184 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 184. OF SIMPLE SHADOWS. Why, at the intersections "a", "b" of the two compound shadows "e f" and "m e", is a simple shadow pfoduced as at "e h" and "m g", while no such simple shadow is produced at the other two intersections c d made by the very same compound shadows...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 163 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 163. p. 94 On the relation of derived and primary shadow (163-165).The derived shadow can never resemble the body from which it proceeds unless the light is of the same form and size as the body causing the shadow. The derived shadow cannot be of the same form...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 751 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 751. The pavilion in the garden of the Duchess of Milan. The plan of the pavilion which is in the middle of the labyrinth of the Duke of Milan. 362 FOOTNOTES 34:362 : This passage was first published by AMORETTI in Memorie Storiche Cap. X: Una sua opera da riportarsi...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1521 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1521. The cistern... at the Hospital,--2 ducats,--beans,-white maize,--red maize,--millet,--buckwheat, --kidney beans,--beans,--peas.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 257 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 257. Of several bodies of equal size and tone, that which is farthest will appear the lightest and smallest.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 803 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 803. p. 113 Plans for the representation of muscles by drawings (803-809).You must show all the motions of the bones with their joints to follow the demonstration of the first three figures of the bones, and this should be done in the first book.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 57 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 390. OF THE NATURE OF THE FOLDS IN DRAPERY. On draperies (390--392).That part of a fold which is farthest from the ends where it is confined will fall most nearly in its natural form. Every thing by nature tends to remain at rest. Drapery, being of equal density...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 40 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 40. p. 27 ON PAINTING. General remarks on perspective (40-41).Perspective is the best guide to the art of Painting. 25 FOOTNOTES 27:25 : 40. Compare 53, 2.
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1129. Of Music (1129. 1130).A drum with cogs working by wheels with springs . 629 p. 282 A square drum of which the parchment may be drawn tight or slackened by the lever "a b" . A drum for harmony . A clapper for harmony; that is, three clappers together. Just as one...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 921 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 921. p. 176 First you shall make a book treating of places occupied by fresh waters, and the second by salt waters, and the third, how by the disappearance of these, our parts of the world were made lighter and in consequence more remote from the centre of the world.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1421 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1421. p. 429 Concave mirrors; philosophy of Aristotle; 737 738 the books of Avicenna Italian and Latin vocabulary; Messer Ottaviano Palavicino or his Vitruvius 739 . bohemian knives; Vitruvius 740 ; go every Saturday to the hot bath where you will see naked men;...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 42 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1209. Against friars. Pharisees--that is to say, friars. 645 FOOTNOTES 302:645 : Compare No. 837, ll. 54-57, No. 1296 (p. 363 and 364), and No. 1305 (p. 370).
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 289. p. 157 General rules (289--291).The variety of colour in objects cannot be discerned at a great distance, excepting in those parts which are directly lighted up by the solar rays.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1381 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1381. NAMES OF ENGINEERS. Callias of Rhodes, Epimachus the Athenian, Diogenes, a philosopher, of Rhodes, Calcedonius of Thrace, Febar of Tyre, Callimachus the architect, a master of fires. 711 FOOTNOTES 422:711 : Callias, Architect of Aradus, mentioned by Vitruvius (X...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 49 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 344. The arm and head.From "b" to "a" is one head, as well as from "c" to "a" and this happens when the elbow forms a right angle. 164 FOOTNOTES 183:164 : See Pl. XLI, No. 1.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1245 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1245. p. 326 THE ELEPHANT. The huge elephant has by nature what is rarely found in man; that is Honesty, Prudence, Justice, and the Observance of Religion; inasmuch as when the moon is new, these beasts go down to the rivers, and there, solemnly cleansing themselves...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 249 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 249. p. 136 TO PROVE HOW IT IS THAT LUMINOUS BODIES APPEAR LARGER, AT A DISTANCE, THAN THEY ARE. If you place two lighted candles side by side half a braccio apart, and go from them to a distance 200 braccia you will see that by the increased size of each they will...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1346. Draft of letter to be sent to Piacenza (1346. 1347).Magnificent Commissioners of Buildings I, understanding that your Magnificencies have made up your minds to make certain great works in bronze, will remind you of certain things: first that you should not be so...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 676. Pleasure and Pain represent as twins, since there never is one without the other; and as if they were united back to back, since they are contrary to each other. Clay, gold. 310 If you take Pleasure know that he has behind him one who will deal you Tribulati...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 524 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 524. p. 262 A METHOD OF DRAWING AN OBJECT IN RELIEF AT NIGHT. Place a sheet of not too transparent paper between the relievo and the light and you can draw thus very well. 249 FOOTNOTES 262:249 : Bodies thus illuminated will show on the surface of the paper how...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1253 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1253. therefore knowing this, it hides its face, and the surrounding animals grow bold and come close, the better to enjoy the sight of so much beauty; when suddenly it seizes the nearest and at once devours it. CAMELS. The Bactrian have two humps; the Arabian one only...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1529 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1529. Memorandum of the money I have had from the King as my salary from July 1508 till April next 1509. First 100 scudi, then 70, then 50, then 20 and then 200 florins at 48 soldi the florin. 849 FOOTNOTES 459:849 : Compare No. 1350 and 1561.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1358. And in this case I know that I shall make few enemies seeing that no one will believe what I can say of him; for they are but 689 p. 413 few whom his vices have disgusted, and he only dislikes those men whose natures are contrary to those vices. And many hate...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 668. Philip, Simon, Matthew, Thomas, James the Greater, Peter, Philip, Andrew, Bartholomew. 305 FOOTNOTES 347:305 : See Pl. XLVI. The names of the disciples are given in the order in which they are written in the original, from right to left, above each head...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 759 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 759. p. 64 "G. DESCRIPTION OF AN UNKNOWN TEMPLE." Twelve flights of steps led up to the great temple, which was eight hundred braccia in circumference and built on an octagonal plan. At the eight corners were eight large plinths, one braccia and a half high, and three...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 532 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 532. THAT A PAINTER OUGHT TO BE CURIOUS TO HEAR THE OPINIONS OF EVERY ONE ON HIS WORK. Certainly while a man is painting he ought not to shrink from hearing every opinion. For we know very well that a man, though he may not be a painter, is familiar with the forms...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1117. A METHOD OF ESCAPING IN A TEMPEST AND SHIPWRECK AT SEA. The use of swimming belts.Have a coat made of leather, which must be double across the breast, that is having a hem on each side of about a finger breadth. Thus it will be double from the waist to the knee;...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 56 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 56. there are only bases without pyramids which constantly diminish up to this point. And from the first base where the vertical plane is placed towards the point in the eye there will be only pyramids without bases; p. 36 as shown in the example given above. Now, let...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 937 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 937. WHETHER THE EARTH IS LESS THAN THE WATER. Of the proportion of the mass of water to that of the earth (937. 938).Some assert that it is true that the earth, which is not covered by water is much less than that covered by water. But considering the size of 7000...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1437 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1437. Giovanni Fabre,--Lazaro del Volpe,-- the common,--Ser Piero. 755 FOOTNOTES 432:755 : These names are inserted on a plan of plots of land adjoining the Arno.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 54 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1188. Rules of Life (1188-1202). If you governed your body by the rules of virtue you would not walk on all fours in this world. You grow in reputation like bread in the hands of a child. 639 FOOTNOTES 296:639 : The first sentence is obscure. Compare Nos. 825, 826.
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 300. OF THE COLOUR OF THE ATMOSPHERE. On the colour of the atmosphere (300-307).I say that the blueness we see in the atmosphere is not intrinsic colour, but is caused by warm vapour evaporated in minute and insensible atoms on which the solar rays fall, rendering them...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 175 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 175. ON PAINTING. On the relative intensity of derived shadows (175-179).The derived shadow is stronger in proportion as it is nearer to its place of origin.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 747 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 747. The main underground channel does not receive turbid water, but that water runs in the ditches outside the town with four mills at the entrance and four at the outlet; and this may be done by damming the water above Romorantin. [11]There should be fountains made...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 241 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 241. OF ORDINARY PERSPECTIVE. An object of equal breadth and colour throughout, seen against a background of various colours will appear unequal in breadth. And if an object of equal breadth throughout, but of various colours, is seen against a background of uniform...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 815 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 815. The tears come from the heart and not from the brain. Define all the parts, of which the body is composed, beginning with the skin with its outer cuticle which is often chapped by the influence of the sun.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 352. OF PAINTING. The arm, as it turns, thrusts back its shoulder towards the middle of the back.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1052 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1052. From Bonconventi to Casa Nova are 10 miles, from Casa Nova to Chiusi 9 miles, from Chiusi to Perugia, from, Perugia to Santa Maria degli Angeli, and then to Fuligno. 572 FOOTNOTES 243:572 : Most of the places here described lie within the district shown...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1389 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1389. Chiliarch--captain of 1000. Prefects--captains. A legion, six thousand and sixty three men.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 411. The bough of the walnut which is only hit and beaten when it has brought to perfection... 206 FOOTNOTES 211:206 : The end of the text and the sketch in red chalk belonging to it, are entirely effaced.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 48 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 48. OF DRAWING OUTLINE. Consider with the greatest care the form of the outlines of every object, and the character of their undulations. And these undulations must be separately studied, as to whether the curves are composed of arched convexities or angular concavities.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 192 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 192. On the outlines of cast shadows (192-195).The edges of a derived shadow will be most distinct where it is cast nearest to the primary shadow.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1429 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1429. This stratagem was used by the Gauls against the Romans, and so great a mortality ensued that all Rome was dressed in mourning. 750 FOOTNOTES 430:750 : Leonardo perhaps alludes to the Gauls under Brennus, who laid his sword in the scale when the tribute w...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 929 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 929. p. 179 THE BEGINNING OF THE TREATISE ON WATER. General introduction.By the ancients man has been called the world in miniature; and certainly this name is well bestowed, because, inasmuch as man is composed of earth, water, air and fire, his body resembles th...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 596 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 596. p. 299 When you draw the nude always sketch the whole figure and then finish those limbs which seem to you the best, but make them act with the other limbs; otherwise you will get a habit of never putting the limbs well together on the body. Never make the head...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 38 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 26. OF THE EYE. Differences of perception by one eye and by both eyes (26-29).When both eyes direct the pyramid of sight to an object, that object becomes clearly seen and comprehended by the eyes.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 731 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 731. TO CAST. On bronze casting generally (731-740).Tartar burnt and powdered with plaster and cast cause the plaster to hold together when it is mixed up again; and then it will dissolve in water.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 974 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 974. WATER. OF THE MOVEMENT OF A SUDDEN RUSH MADE BY A RIVER IN ITS BEDPREVIOUSLY DRY. In proportion as the current of the water given forth by the draining of the lake is slow or rapid in the dry river bed, so will this river be wider or narrower, or shallower...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1474 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1474. p. 446 The Archimedes belonging to the Bishop of Padua. 817 FOOTNOTES 446:817 : 1474. See No. 1421, 1. 3, 6 and Vol. I, No. 343.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 632 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 632. TO RESTORE OIL COLOURS THAT HAVE BECOME DRY. If you want to restore oil colours that have become dry keep them soaking in soft soap for a night and, with your finger, mix them up with the soft soap; then pour them into a cup and wash them with water, and in this...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 916 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 916. Of time and its divisions (916-918).Although time is included in the class of Continuous Quantities, being indivisible and immaterial, it does not come entirely under the head of Geometry, which represents its divisions by means of figures and bodies of infinite...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 488 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 488. p. 245 OF PAINTING. The necessity of anatomical knowledge (488. 489).It is indispensable to a Painter who would be thoroughly familiar with the limbs in all the positions and actions of which they are capable, in the nude, to know the anatomy of the sinews, bones...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 40 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XXI. LETTERS. PERSONAL RECORDS. DATED NOTES Introduction 1336. 1337. 1338. 1339. 1340. 1341. 1342. 1343. 1344. 1345. 1346. 1347. 1348. 1349. 1350. 1351. 1352. 1353. 1354. 1355. 1356. 1357. 1358. 1359. 1360. 1361. 1362. 1363. 1364. 1365. 1366. 1367. 1368. 1369. 1370. 1371...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 848 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 848. p. 132 Death in old men, when not from fever, is caused by the veins which go from the spleen to the valve of the liver, and which thicken so much in the walls that they become closed up and leave no passage for the blood that nourishes it. On the circulati...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 128 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 128. General remarks (128. 129).Light is the chaser away of darkness. Shade is the obstruction of light. Primary light is that which falls on objects and causes light and shade. And derived lights are those portions of a body which are illuminated by the primary light...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1493 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1493. Ammianus Marcellinus asserts that seven hundred thousand volumes of books were burnt in the siege of Alexandria in the time of Julius Cesar. 828 FOOTNOTES 450:828 : Ammiani Marcellini historiarum libri qui extant XIII, published at Rome in 1474.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 993 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 993. You now have to prove that the shells cannot have originated if not in salt water, almost all being of that sort; and that the shells in Lombardy are at four levels, p. 218 and thus it is everywhere, having been made at various times. And they all occur in valleys...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1111 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1111. Centrae Asia.Mounts Caucasus, Comedorum, and Paropemisidae are joined together between Bactria and India, and give birth to the river Oxus which takes its rise in these mountains and flows 500 miles towards the North and as many towards the West, and discharges...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 571 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 571. p. 287 IV. OF PORTRAIT AND FIGURE PAINTING. OF THE WAY TO LEARN TO COMPOSE FIGURES [IN GROUPS] IN HISTORICAL PICTURES. Of sketching figures and portraits (571-572).When you have well learnt perspective and have by heart the parts and forms of objects, you must go...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1011 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1011. No canal which is fed by a river can be permanent if the river whence it originates is not wholly closed up, like the canal of Martesana which is fed by the Ticino.
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 771. The cracks in walls will never be parallel unless the part of the wall that separates from the remainder does not slip down. WHAT IS THE LAW BY WHICH BUILDINGS HAVE STABILITY. The stability of buildings is the result of the contrary law to the two former cases...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 38. The pupil of the eye, in the open air, changes in size with every degree of motion from the sun; and at every degree of its changes one and the same object seen by it will appear of a different size; although most frequently the relative scale of surrounding objects...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 51 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 430. The gradations of shade and colour in leaves (430-434).The shadows of plants are never black, for where the atmosphere penetrates there can never be utter darkness.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 588 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 588. Of the limbs, which ought to be carefully selected, and of all the other parts with regard to painting.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1310 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1310. (Of Grain and other Seeds.) Men will fling out of their houses those victuals which were intended to sustain their life. (Of Trees, which nourish grafted shoots.) Fathers and mothers will be seen to take much more delight in their step-children then in their own...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 136 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 136. The relations of luminous to illuminated bodies.The middle of the light and shade on an object in light and shade is opposite to the middle of the primary light. All light and shadow expresses itself in pyramidal lines. The middle of the shadow on any object must...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 496 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 496. OF STUDYING, IN THE DARK, WHEN YOU WAKE, OR IN BED BEFORE YOU GO TO SLEEP. I myself have proved it to be of no small use, when in bed in the dark, to recall in fancy the external details of forms previously studied, or other noteworthy things conceived by subtle...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 908 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 908. OF HALOS ROUND THE MOON. On the moon's halo.I have found, that the circles which at night seem to surround the moon, of various sizes, and degrees of density are caused by various gradations in the densities of the vapours which exist at different altitudes between...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 334. The relative proportions of the head and of the torso.From the roots of the hair to the top of the breast "a b" is the sixth part of the height of a man and this measure is equal. p. 180 From the outside part of one shoulder to the other is the same distance...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 856 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 856. I teach you to preserve your health; and in this you will succed better in proportion as you shun physicians, because their medicines are the work of alchemists. 440 FOOTNOTES 133:440 : This passage is written on the back of the drawing Pl. CVIII. Compare also No...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 628 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 628. TO PREPARE A PANEL FOR PAINTING ON. Of preparing the panel.The panel should be cypress or pear or service-tree or walnut. You must coat it over with mastic and turpentine twice distilled and white or, if you like, lime, and put it in a frame so that it may exp...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1314 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1314. p. 373 V. DRAUGHTS AND SCHEMES FOR THE HUMOROUS WRITINGS. A FABLE. Schemes for fables, etc. (1314-1323).The crab standing under the rock to catch the fish which crept under it, it came to pass that the rock fell with a ruinous downfall of stones, and by their fall...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 1000 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1000. The globe an organism.Nothing originates in a spot where there is no sentient, vegetable and rational life; feathers grow upon birds and are changed every year; hairs grow upon animals and are changed every year, excepting some parts, like the hairs of the beard...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 55 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 426. the eye and the light which falls upon it from the opposite side. And its shadows are in the same positions as those were of the opposite side. Therefore, O Painter! when you do trees close at hand, remember that if the eye is almost under the tree you will see its...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 22 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 776. This wall will break under the arch "e f", because the seven whole square bricks are not sufficient to sustain the spring of the arch placed on them. And these seven bricks will give way in their middle exactly as appears in "a b". The reason is, that the brick "a"...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1015 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1015. p. 233 To make the great canal, first make the smaller one and conduct into it the waters which by a wheel will help to fill the great one.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 852 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 852. p. 133 A remedy for scratches taught me by the Herald to the King of France. 4 ounces of virgin wax, 4 ounces of colophony, 2 ounces of incense. Keep each thing separate; and melt the wax, and then put in the incense and then the colophony, make a mixture of it...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 330. "a n b" are equal; "c n d" are equal; "n c" makes two feet; "n d" makes 2 feet. 152 FOOTNOTES 178:152 : See the lower sketch, Pl. XIV, No. 1.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 492 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 492. HOW THAT DILIGENCE [ACCURACY] SHOULD FIRST BE LEARNT RATHER THAN RAPID EXECUTION. If you, who draw, desire to study well and to good purpose, always go slowly to work in your drawing; and discriminate in. the lights, which have the highest degree of brightness...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1489 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1489. 5th Book of Euclid. First definition: a part is a quantity of less magnitude than the greater magnitude when the less is contained a certain number of times in the greater. A part properly speaking is that which may be multiplied, that is when, being multiplied by...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 989 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 989. p. 214 A CONFUTATION OF THOSE WHO SAY THAT SHELLS MAY HAVE BEEN CARRIED TO A DISTANCE OF MANY DAYS' JOURNEY FROM THE SEA BY THE DELUGE, WHICH WAS SO HIGH AS TO BE ABOVE THOSE HEIGHTS. Further researches (989-991).I say that the deluge could not carry objects...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 132 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 132. p. 80 The difference between light and lustre (132--135).Of the difference between light and lustre; and that lustre is not included among colours, but is saturation of whiteness, and derived from the surface of wet bodies; light partakes of the colour...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 735 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 735. p. 21 [Dried earth 16 pounds, 100 pounds of metal wet clay 20,--of wet 100,-half,- which increases 4 Ibs. of water,--1 of wax, 1 Ib. of metal, a little less,-the scrapings of linen with earth, measure for measure.] 353 FOOTNOTES 21:353 : The translation is given...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1140. Psychology (1140-1147). And you, O Man, who will discern in this work of mine the wonderful works of Nature, if you think it would be a criminal thing to destroy it, reflect how much more criminal it is to take the life of a man; and if this, his external form...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 636 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 636. VARNISH [OR POWDER]. Notch a juniper tree and give it water at the roots, mix the liquor which exudes with nut-oil and you will have a perfect varnish [powder], made like amber varnish [powder], fine and of the best quality make it in May or April.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1470 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1470. Nonius Marcellus, Festus Pompeius, Marcus Varro. 814 FOOTNOTES 445:814 : Nonius Marcellus and Sextus Pompeius Festus were Roman grammarians of about the fourth century A. D. Early publications of the works of Marcellus are: De proprietate sermonis, Romae...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 970 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 970. p. 200 IV. OF RIVERS. OF THE ORIGIN OF RIVERS. On the way in which the sources of rivers are fed.The body of the earth, like the bodies of animals, is intersected with ramifications of waters which are all in connection and are constituted to give nutriment...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 592 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 592. OF GRACE IN THE LIMBS. How to pose figures.The limbs should be adapted to the body with grace and with reference to the effect that you wish the figure to produce. And if you wish to produce a figure that shall of itself look light and graceful you must make...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 575 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 575. THE PROOF AND REASON WHY AMONG THE ILLUMINATED PARTS CERTAIN PORTIONS ARE IN HIGHER LIGHT THAN OTHERS. Since it is proved that every definite light is, or seems to be, derived from one single p. 290 point the side illuminated by it will have its highest light...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 997 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 997. p. 220 The element of fire acts upon a wave of air in the same way as the air does on water, or as water does on a mass of sand --that is earth; and their motions are in the same proportions as those of the motors acting upon them.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1497 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1497. The catapult, as we are told by Nonius and Pliny, is a machine devised by those &c 831 FOOTNOTES 451:831 : Plinius, see No. 946.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 318. "a b", "c d", "e f", "g h", "i k" are equal to each other in size excepting that "d f" is accidental. 138 FOOTNOTES 173:138 : See Pl. XI.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 912 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 912. WHETHER THE STARS HAVE THEIR LIGHT FROM THE SUN OR IN THEMSELVES. Some say that they shine of themselves, alledging that if Venus and Mercury had not a light of their own, when they come between our eye and the sun they would darken so much of the sun as they could...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1533 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1533. I gave to Salai 93 lire 6 soldi, of which I have had 67 lire and there remain 26 lire 6 soldi.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 245 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 245. WHY BODIES IN LIGHT AND SHADE HAVE THEIR OUTLINES ALTERED BY THE COLOUR AND BRIGHTNESS OF THE OBJECTS SERVING AS A BACKGROUND TO THEM. If you look at a body of which the illuminated portion lies and ends against a dark background, that part of the light which will...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1342. You would like to see a model which will prove useful to you and to me, also it will be of use to those who will be the cause of our usefulness. 675 FOOTNOTES 398:675 : 1342. 1343. These two notes occur in the same not very voluminous MS. as the former one and it...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 672. Il Moro as representing Good Fortune, with hair, and robes, and his hands in front, and Messer Gualtieri taking him by the robes with a respectful air from below, having come in from the front . Again, Poverty in a hideous form running behind a youth. Il Moro...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1249 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1249. they would be drowned, therefore they combine. THE SERPENT. The serpent is a very large animal. When it sees a bird in the air it draws in its breath so strongly that it draws the birds into its mouth too. Marcus Regulus, the consul of the Roman army was attacked...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 45 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 348. p. 184 "a b" goes 4 times into "a c" and 9 into "a m". The greatest thickness of the arm between the elbow and the hand goes 6 times into "a m" and is equal to "r f". The greatest thickness of the arm between the shoulder and the elbow goes 4 times into "c m"...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 811 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 811. OF THE HUMAN FIGURE. Which is the part in man, which, as he grows fatter, never gains flesh? Or what part which as a man grows lean never falls away with a too perceptible diminution? And among the parts which grow fat which is that which grows fattest? p. 116...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 171 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 171. OF PAINTING. Of different shadows of equal strength that which is nearest the eye will seem the least strong. Why is the shadow "e a b" in the first grade of strength, "b c" in the second; "c d" in the third? The reason is that as from "e a b" the sky is nowhere...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 743 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 743. The construction of the stairs: The stairs "c d" go down to "f g", and in the same way "f g" goes down to "h k".
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 196 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 196. THE BODY WHICH IS NEAREST TO THE LIGHT CASTS THE LARGEST SHADOW, AND WHY? On the relative size of shadows (196. 197).If an object placed in front of a single light is very close to it you will see that it casts a very large shadow on the opposite wall...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 407. The lowest branches, after they have formed the angle of their separation from the parent stem, always bend downwards so as not to crowd against the other branches which follow them on the same stem and p. 210 to be better able to take the air which nourishes them...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1056 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1056. p. 245 At Alessandria della Paglia in Lombardy there are no stones for making lime of, but such as are mixed up with an infinite variety of things native to the sea, which is now more than 200 miles away.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Xii : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XII. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGNS Introduction I. Plans for towns 741. 742. 743. 744. II. Plans for Canals and streets in a town. 745. 746. 747. III. Castles and Villas. 748. 749. 750. 751. 752. 753. 754. 755. B. The theory of Dome Architecture. 1. Churches formed on the pl...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 536 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 536. HOW HIGH THE POINT OF SIGHT SHOULD BE PLACED. On the choice of a position (536-537)The point of sight must be at the level of the eye of an ordinary man, and the farthest limit of the plain where it touches the sky must be placed at the level of that line where...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1257 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1257. THE AMPHISBOENA. This has two heads, one in its proper place the other at the tail; as if one place were not enough from which to fling its venom. THE IACULUS. This lies on trees, and flings itself down like a dart, and pierces through the wild beast and kills...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 664. p. 345 Bernardo di Bandino's Portrait.A tan-coloured small cap, A doublet of black serge, A black jerkin lined A blue coat lined, with fur of foxes' breasts, and the collar of the jerkin covered with black and white stippled velvet Bernardo di Bandino Baroncelli;...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1354. Miscellaneous Records (1354. 1355).Dear Benedetto de' Pertarti. When the proud giant fell because of the bloody and miry state of the ground it was as though a mountain had fallen so that the country shook as with an earthquake, and terror fell on Pluto in hell...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 296. p. 160 The medium lying between the eye and the object seen, tinges that object with its colour, as the blueness of the atmosphere makes the distant mountains appear blue and red glass makes objects seen beyond it, look red. The light shed round them by the stars...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1048 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1048. There might be a harmony of the different falls of water as you saw them at the fountain of Rimini on the 8th day of August, 1502.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1433 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1433. The book on Water to Messer Marco Antonio. 751 FOOTNOTES 431:751 : Possibly Marc-Antonio della Torre, see p. 97.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 933 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 933. Of the surface of the water in relation to the globe (933-936).The centres of the sphere of water are two, one universal and common to all water, the other particular. The universal one is that which is common to all waters not in motion, which exist in gre...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 188 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 188. p. 107 FOURTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. On the shape of the cast shadows (188-191).The form of the shadow cast by any body of uniform density can never be the same as that of the body producing it. 91 FOOTNOTES 107:91 : Comp. the drawing on Pl. XXVIII, No. 5.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 50 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1194. The memory of benefits is a frail defence against ingratitude. Reprove your friend in secret and praise him openly. Be not false about the past.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 52 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 52. p. 32 Experimental proof of the existence of the pyramid of sight (52-55).Perspective is a rational demonstration, confirmed by experience, that all objects transmit their image to the eye by a pyramid of lines. By a pyramid of lines I understand those lines which...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1121. A definition as to why a man who slides on ice does not fall. 625 FOOTNOTES 278:625 : An indistinct sketch accompanies the passage, in the original.
Vol. I. List Of Illustrations In Volume I : * p. xxv All drawings here reproduced are in pen and ink, unless otherwise stated. The reproductions are of the exact size of the originals, except that Plates I, XVIII and are slightly reduced. Plate I is the frontispiece; Plate II is on p. 124; Plates III--XXXV follow p. 124; Plate XXXVI is on p...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 415. p. 213 OF THE INSERTION OF THE LEAVES ON THE BRANCHES. The thickness of a branch never diminishes within the space between one leaf and the next excepting by so much as the thickness of the bud which is above the leaf and this thickness is taken off from the branch...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 543 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 543. A PICTURE OF OBJECTS IN PERSPECTIVE WILL LOOK MORE LIFELIKE WHEN SEEN FROM THE POINT FROM WHICH THE OBJECTS WERE DRAWN. If you want to represent an object near to you which is to have the effect of nature, it is impossible that your perspective should not look...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1222 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1222. PEACE. We read of the beaver that when it is pursued, knowing that it is for the virtue [contained] in its medicinal testicles and not being able to escape, it stops; and to be at peace with its pursuers, it bites off its testicles with its sharp teeth, and leaves...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1558 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1558. ; 2. 860 FOOTNOTES 466:860 : The notes in Greek, Nos. 1557, 1558 and 1562 stand in close connection with each other, but the meaning of some words is very doubtful, and a translation is thus rendered impossible.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 600 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 600. OF SETTING ON THE LIMBS. The limbs which are used for labour must be muscular and those which are not much used you must make without muscles and softly rounded. OF THE ACTION OF THE FIGURES. Represent your figures in such action as may be fitted to express wh...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1446 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1446. Salvadore, the matress maker, lives on the Piazza di Sant' Andrea, you enter by the furrier's.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 946 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 946. p. 188 II. ON THE OCEAN. WHY WATER IS SALT. Refutation of Pliny's theory as to the saltness of the sea (946. 947).Pliny says in his second book, chapter 103, that the water of the sea is salt because the heat of the sun dries up the moisture and drinks it up;...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1546 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1546. Miseracione divina sacro sancte Romane ecclesie tituli n cardinalis 2wulgariter nuncupatus venerabili religioso fratri Johanni Mair d'Nustorf 3ordinis praedicatorum provintie teutonie (?) conventus Wiennensis capellano 4 nostro commensali salutem in dno sempi...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 230 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 230. OF THE EYE. The edges of an object placed in front of the pupil of the eye will be less distinct in proportion as they are closer to the eye. This is shown by the edge of the object "n" placed in front of the pupil "d"; in looking at this edge the pupil also sees...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 363. O Anatomical Painter! beware lest the too strong indication of the bones, sinews and muscles, be the cause of your becoming wooden in your painting by your wish to make your nude figures display all their feeling. Therefore, in endeavouring to remedy this, look...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 84 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 454. p. 229 The trees of the landscape stand out but little from each other; because their illuminated portions come against the illuminated portions of those beyond and differ little from them in light and shade.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 63 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 476. When clouds come between the sun and the eye all the upper edges of their round forms are light, and towards the middle they p. 238 are dark, and this happens because towards the top these edges have the sun above them while you are below them; and the same thing...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 11. p. 15 Though I may not, like them, be able to quote other authors, I shall rely on that which is much greater and more worthy:--on experience, the mistress of their Masters. They go about puffed up and pompous, dressed and decorated with [the fruits], not of their...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1322 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1322. Seeing the paper all stained with the deep blackness of ink, it he deeply regrets it; and this proves to the paper that the words, composed upon it were the cause of its being preserved.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 958 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 958. p. 193 OF THE FLOW AND EBB. All seas have their flow and ebb in the same period, but they seem to vary because the days do not begin at the same time throughout the universe; in such wise as that when it is midday in our hemisphere, it is midnight in the opposite...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1458 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1458. Notes on pupils (1458-1468.)Giacomo came to live with me on St.-Mary Magdalen's day, 1490, aged 10 years. The second day I had two shirts cut out for him, a pair of hose, and a jerkin, and when I put aside some money to pay for these things he stole 4 "lire"...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 784. I here ask what weight will be needed to counterpoise and resist the tendency of each of these arches to give way? 405 FOOTNOTES 89:405 : The two lower sketches are taken from the MS. S. K. M. III, 10a; they have there no explanatory text.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1023 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1023. Note on Pavia.The chimneys of the castle of Pavia have 6 rows of openings and from each to the other is one braccio. 549 FOOTNOTES 235:549 : Other notes relating to Pavia occur on p. 43 and p. 53 (Pl. XCVIII, No. 3). Compare No. 1448, 26.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1286 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1286. A man saw a large sword which another one wore at his side. Said he "Poor fellow, for a long time I have seen you tied to that weapon; why do you not release yourself as your hands are untied, and set yourself free?" To which the other replied: "This is none...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 64 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 64. The body of the atmosphere is full of infinite radiating pyramids produced by the objects existing in it. These intersect and cross each other with independent convergence without interfering with each other and pass through all the surrounding atmosphere; and p. 40...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 879 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 879. p. 148 II. THE SUN. IN PRAISE OF THE SUN. The question of the true and of the apparent size of the sun (879-884).If you look at the stars, cutting off the rays (as may be done by looking through a very small hole made with the extreme point of a very fine needle...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 740 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 740. OF LUTING THE FURNACE WITHIN. The furnace must be luted before you put the metal in it, with earth from Valenza, and over that with ashes. 354 OF RESTORING THE METAL WHEN IT IS BECOMING COOL. When you see that the bronze is congealing take some willow-wood cut...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 66 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1203. Politics (1203. 1204).There will be eternal fame also for the inhabitants of that town, constructed and enlarged by him. 642 p. 300 All communities obey and are led by their magnates, and these magnates ally themselves with the lords and subjugate them in two ways...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1405 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1405. 24 tavole make 1 perch. 4 trabochi make 1 tavola. 4 braccia and a half make a trabocco. A perch contains 1936 square braccia, or 1944.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 643 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 643. p. 324 Pitch four ounces virgin wax, four ounces incense, two ounces oil of roses one ounce.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 159 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 159. Shadow is diminution of light. Darkness is absence of light. Shadow is divided into two kinds, of which the first is called primary shadow, the second is derived shadow. The primary shadow is always the basis of the derived shadow. The edges of the derived shadow...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 135 "XV". "ASTRONOMY". "Ever since the publication by Venturi in" 1797 "and Libri in" 1840 of some few passages of Leonardo's astronomical notes, scientific astronomers have frequently expressed the opinion, that they must have been based on very important...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 500 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 500. THAT A PAINTER IS NOT ADMIRABLE UNLESS HE IS UNIVERSAL. Some may distinctly assert that those persons are under a delusion who call that painter a good master who can do nothing well but a head or a figure. Certainly this is no great achievement; after studying one...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 83 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 83. OF THE PLANE OF GLASS. Demostration of perspective by means of a vertical glass plane (83-85).Perspective is nothing else than seeing place [or objects] behind a plane of glass, quite transparent, on the surface of which the objects behind that glass are to be drawn...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 279 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 279. p. 150 On gradations in the depth of colours (279. 280).Since black, when painted next to white, looks no blacker than when next to black; and white when next to black looks no whiter than white, as is seen by the images transmitted through a small hole or by...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 31 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1372. p. 416 On the 9th of July 1504, Wednesday, at seven o'clock, died Ser Piero da Vinci, notary at the Palazzo del Podest, my father, --at seven o'clock, being eighty years old, leaving behind ten sons and two daughters. 699 FOOTNOTES 416:699 : This statement of Ser...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1099 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1099. Customs of Asiatic Nations (1099. 1100).The Assyrians and the people of Euboea accustom their horses to carry sacks which they can at pleasure fill with air, and which in case of need they carry instead of the girth of the saddle above and at the side, and they...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 839 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 839. HOW THE NERVES SOMETIMES ACT OF THEMSELVES WITHOUT ANY COMMANDS FROM THE OTHER FUNCTIONS OF THE SOUL. On involuntary muscular action.This is most plainly seen; for you will see palsied and shivering persons move, p. 129 and their trembling limbs, as their head...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1261 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1261. THE LIZARD. This, when fighting with serpents eats the sow-thistle and is free. THE SWALLOW. This [bird] gives sight to its blind young ones, with the juice of the celandine. THE WEASEL. This, when chasing rats first eats of rue. THE WILD BOAR. This beast cures...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 867 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 867. p. 140 THE METHOD OF PROVING THAT THE EARTH IS A STAR. First describe the eye; then show how the twinkling of a star is really in the eye and why one star should twinkle more than another, and how the rays from the stars originate in the eye; and add, that if...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 204 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 204. The edges of the derived shadow are defined by the hues of the illuminated objects surrounding the luminous body which produces the shadow.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 403. p. 208 OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF PLANTS. The direction of growth (403-407).The plants which spread very much have the angles of the spaces which divide their branches more obtuse in proportion as their point of origin is lower down; that is nearer to the thickest...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 78 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XIX. PHILOSOPHICAL MAXIMS. MORALS. POLEMICS AND SPECULATIONS Introduction 1132. 1133. 1134. 1135. 1136. 1137. 1138. 1139. 1140. 1141. 1142. 1143. 1144. 1145. 1146. 1147. 1148. 1149. 1150. 1151. 1152. 1153. 1154. 1155. 1156. 1157. 1158. 1159. 1160. 1161. 1162. 1163. 1164...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1298 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1298. p. 367 The Lion tribe will be seen tearing open the earth with their clawed paws and in the caves thus made, burying themselves together with the other animals that are beneath them. Animals will come forth from the earth in gloomy vesture, which will attack...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1060 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1060. p. 246 And this may be seen, as I saw it, by any one going up Monbroso 578 , a peak of the Alps which divide France from Italy. The base of this mountain gives birth to the 4 rivers which flow in four different directions through the whole of Europe. And no...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 280 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 280. OF COLOURS. Of several colours, all equally white, that will look whitest which is against the darkest background. And black will look intensest against the whitest background. And red will look most vivid against the yellowest background; and the same is the case...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 267 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 267. OF LIGHT AND SHADE. Every portion of the surface of a body is varied [in hue] by the [reflected] colour of the object that may be opposite to it. p. 144 EXAMPLE. If you place a spherical body between various objects that is to say with [direct] sunlight on one side...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 73 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 372. A man when running throws less weight on his legs than when standing still. And in the same way a horse which is running feels less the weight of the man he carries. Hence many persons think it wonderful that, in running, the horse can rest on one single p. 195...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 827 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 827. p. 121 III. PHYSIOLOGY. Comparative study of the organs of sense in men and animals.I have found that in the composition of the human body as compared with the bodies of animals the organs of sense are duller and coarser. Thus it is composed of less ingenious...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1505 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1505. Virgil says that a blank shield is devoid of merit because among the people of Athens the true recognition confirmed by testimonies... 838 FOOTNOTES 453:838 : The end of the text cannot be deciphered.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1087 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1087. p. 260 Libya.Describe the mountains of shifting deserts; that is to say the formation of waves of sand borne by the wind, and of its mountains and hills, such as occur in Libya. Examples may be seen on the wide sands of the Po and the Ticino, and other large...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 147 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 147. p. 86 OF PAINTING. That part of a body which receives the luminous rays at equal angles will be in a higher light than any other part of it. And the part which the luminous rays strike between less equal angles will be less strongly illuminated.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 880 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 880. p. 149 of its size and power I shall reserve for Book 4. But I wonder greatly that Socrates 458 should have depreciated that solar body, saying that it was of the nature of incandescent stone, and the one who opposed him as to that error was not far wrong. But I...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 284 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 284. WHY BEAUTIFUL COLOURS MUST BE IN THE [HIGHEST] LIGHT. On the use of dark and light colours in painting (284--286).Since we see that the quality of colour is known [only] by means of light, it is to be supposed that where there is most light the true character...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1064 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1064. And of these I found some in the rocks of the high Appenines and mostly at the rock of La Vernia. 581 FOOTNOTES 247:581 6: "Sasso della Vernia." The frowning rock between the sources of the Arno and the Tiber, as Dante describes this mountain, which is 1269 metres...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 659 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 659. Though you may be able to tell or write the exact description of forms, the painter can so depict them that they will appear alive, with the shadow and light which show the expression of a face; which you cannot accomplish with the pen though it can be achieved by...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 200 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 200. On the relative depth of cast shadows (200-202).A spot is most in the shade when a large number of darkened rays fall upon it. The spot which receives the rays at the widest angle and by darkened rays will be most in the dark; a will be twice as dark as b, because...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 863 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 863. Each man is always in the middle of the surface of the earth and under the zenith of his own hemisphere, and over the centre of the earth.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 399. The plant which gives out the smallest ramifications will preserve the straightest line in the course of its growth. 203 FOOTNOTES 206:203 : This passage is illustrated by two partly effaced sketches. One of these closely resembles the lower one given under No. 408...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 884 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 884. Posidonius composed books on the size of the sun. 461 FOOTNOTES 151:461 : Poseidonius of Apamea, commonly called the Rhodian, because he taught in Rhodes, was a Stoic philosopher, a contemporary and friend of Cicero's, and the author of numerous works on natural...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 99 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 99. OF LINEAR PERSPECTIVE. The apparent size of objects defined by calculation (99-105)Linear Perspective deals with the action of the lines of sight, in proving by measurement how much smaller is a second object than the first, and how much the third is smaller th...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 143 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 143. A body in shadow situated between the light and the eye can never display its illuminated portion unless the eye can see the whole of the primary light. 64 FOOTNOTES 84:64 : "A" stands for "corpo" (body), "B" for "lume" (light).
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 679. Arrangement of a Picture. John the Baptist Saint Augustin Saint Peter Paul Elisabeth Saint Clara. Bernardino Our Lady Louis Bonaventura Anthony of Padua. Saint Francis. Francis, Anthony, a lily and book; Bernardino with the [monogram of] Jesus, Louis with 3 fleur...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 823 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 823. A second demonstration inserted between anatomy and [the treatise on] the living being. You will represent here for a comparison, the legs of a frog, which have a great resemblance to the legs of man, both in the bones and in the muscles. Then, in continuati...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 77 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 368. The movement of the human figure (368-375).Of the manner of representing the 18 actions of man. Repose, movement, running, standing, supported, sitting, leaning, kneeling, lying down, suspended. Carrying or being carried, thrusting, pulling, striking, being struck...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1083 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1083. p. 258 III. THE COUNTRIES OF THE WESTERN END OF THE MEDITERRANEAN. WHY THE SEA MAKES A STRONGER CURRENT IN THE STRAITS OF SPAIN THAN ELSEWHERE. The straits of Gibraltar (1083-1085).A river of equal depth runs with greater speed in a narrow space than in a wide one...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1501 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1501. Messer Vincenzio Aliprando, who lives near the Inn of the Bear, has Giacomo Andrea's Vitruvius.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 263 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 263. p. 143 OF PAINTING. The reciprocal effects of colours on objects placed opposite each other (263-272).The hue of an illuminated object is affected by that of the luminous body.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 62 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1207. Against alchemists (1207. 1208).The false interpreters of nature declare that quicksilver is the common seed of every metal, not remembering that nature varies the seed according to the variety of the things she desires to produce in the world.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 647 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 647. Put marcasite into aqua fortis and if it turns green, know that it has copper in it. Take it out with saltpetre and soft soap.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 60 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 60. That the atmosphere attracts to itself, like a loadstone, all the images of the objects that exist in it, and not their forms merely but their nature may be clearly seen by the sun, which is a hot and luminous body. All the atmosphere, which is the all-pervading...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1282 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1282. p. 348 Wine, the divine juice of the grape, finding itself in a golden and richly wrought cup, on the table of Mahomet, was puffed up with pride at so much honour; when suddenly it was struck by a contrary reflection, saying to itself: "What am I about, that I...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1368. p. 415 Maestro Leonardo of Florence. 695 FOOTNOTES 415:695 : So Leonardo writes his name on a sheet with sundry short notes, evidently to try a pen. Compare the signature with those in Nos. 1341, 1348 and 1374 (see also No. 1346, l. 33). The form "Lionardo" does...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 687. p. 358 TO REPRESENT INGRATITUDE. When the sun appears which dispels darkness in general, you put out the light which dispelled it for you in particular for your need and convenience.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1265 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1265. p. 335 II. FABLES. A FABLE. Fables on animals (1265-1270).An oyster being turned out together with other fish in the house of a fisherman near the sea, he entreated a rat to take him to the sea. The rat purposing to eat him bid him open; but as he bit him...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 69 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 377. In going up stairs if you place your hands on your knees all the labour taken by the arms is removed from the sinews at the back of the knees. 186 FOOTNOTES 196:186 : See Pl. XXIII, No. 3.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 504 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 504. HOW SOMETHING MAY BE LEARNT EVERYWHERE. Nature has beneficently provided that throughout the world you may find something to imitate.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 87 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 87. How every large mass sends forth its images, which may diminish through infinity. The images of any large mass being infinitely divisible may be infinitely diminished.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 80 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 458. On the treatment of light for landscapes (458-464).The landscape has a finer azure [tone] when, in fine weather the sun is at noon than at any other time of the day, because the air is purified of moisture; and looking at it under that aspect you will see the trees...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 559 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 559. OF SURROUNDING BODIES BY VARIOUS FORMS OF SHADOW. Take care that the shadows cast upon the surface of the bodies by different objects must undulate according to the various curves of the limbs which cast the shadows, and of the objects on which they are cast.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 234 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 234. PERSPECTIVE. Why objects seen at a distance appear large to the eye and in the image on the vertical plane they appear small. PERSPECTIVE. I ask how far away the eye can discern a non-luminous body, as, for instance, a mountain. It will be very plainly visible if...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1542 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1542. Bed 7 0 S ring 7 0 crockery 2 5 gardener 1 2 . . 2 8 porters 2 1 glasses 1 fuel 3 6 a lock 1
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 34 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 359. p. 189 Just so much as the part "d a" of the nude figure decreases in this position so much does the opposite part increase; that is: in proportion as the length of the part "d a" diminishes the normal size so does the opposite upper part increase beyond its...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1238 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1238. THE GRASSHOPPER. This silences the cuckoo with its song. It dies in oil and revives in vinegar. It sings in the greatest heats THE BAT. The more light there is the blinder this creature becomes; as those who gaze most at the sun become most dazzled.--For Vice...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1027 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1027. Again if the lowest part of the bank which lies across the current of the waters is made in deep and wide steps, after the manner of stairs, the waters which, in their course usually fall perpendicularly from the top of such a place to the bottom, and wear away...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 788. An Experiment to show that a weight placed on an arch does not discharge itself entirely on its columns; on the contrary the greater the weight placed on the arches, the less the arch transmits the weight to the columns. The experiment is the following. Let a m...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 719 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 719. Occasional references to the Sforza monument (719-724).Again, the bronze horse may be taken in hand, which is to be to the immortal glory and eternal honour of the happy memory of the prince your father, and of the illustrious house of Sforza. 342 FOOTNOTES 14:342...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1326 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1326. (Of Peasants who work in shirts) Shadows will come from the East which will blacken with great colour darkness the sky that covers Italy. (Of the Barbers.) All men will take refuge in Africa.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 67 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 472. p. 237 Trees struck by the force of the wind bend to the side towards which the wind is blowing; and the wind being past they bend in the contrary direction, that is in reverse motion.
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 15. p. 17 ON PAINTING AND PERSPECTIVE. The divisions of Perspective are 3, as used in drawing; of these, the first includes the diminution in size of opaque objects; the second treats of the diminution and loss of outline in such opaque objects; the third...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1226 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1226. FLATTERERS OR SYRENS. The syren sings so sweetly that she lulls the mariners to sleep; then she climbs upon the ships and kills the sleeping mariners. p. 318 PRUDENCE. The ant, by her natural foresight provides in the summer for the winter, killing the seeds she...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 241 "IX." "THE PRACTICE OF PAINTING." It is hardly necessary to offer any excuses for the division carried out in the arrangement of the text into practical suggestions and theoretical enquiries. It was evidently intended by Leonardo himself as we conclude...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 547 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 547. WHERE A SPECTATOR SHOULD STAND TO LOOK AT A PICTURE. Supposing "a b" to be the picture and "d" to be the light, I say that if you place yourself between "c" and "e" you will not p. 275 understand the picture well and particularly if it is done in oils, or still...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 942 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 942. p. 186 OF THE SEA, WHICH TO MANY FOOLS APPEARS TO BE HIGHER THAN THE EARTH WHICH FORMS ITS SHORE. The relative height of the surface of the sea to that of the land (942-945)."b d" is a plain through which a river flows to the sea; this plain ends at the se...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 604 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 604. OF THE WAY TO REPRESENT A NIGHT [SCENE]. Of depicting night scenes.That which is entirely bereft of light is all darkness; given a night under these conditions and that you want to represent a night scene,--arrange that there shall be a great fire, then the objects...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1157. The man who blames the supreme certainty of mathematics feeds on confusion, and can never silence the contradictions of sophistical sciences which lead to an eternal quackery.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 707 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 707. p. 10 Some have erred in teaching sculptors to measure the limbs of their figures with threads as if they thought that these limbs were equally round in every part where these threads were wound about them.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 79 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 460. OF TREES AND LIGHTS ON THEM. The best method of practice in representing country scenes, or I should p. 232 say landscapes with their trees, is to choose them so that the sun is covered with clouds so that the landscape receives an universal light and not...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1039 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1039. The bell of Siena, that is the manner of its movement, and the place of the attachment of the clapper. 564 FOOTNOTES 240:564 : The text is accompanied by an indistinct sketch.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 954 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 954. How the river Po, in a short time might dry up the Adriatic sea in the same way as it has dried up a large part of Lombardy.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1454 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1454. A box, a cage,-- A square, to make the bird 777 ,-- Pandolfino's book, mortar [?],-- Small knives, Venieri for the 778 p. 437 Pen for ruling, stone,--star,-- To have the vest dyed, Alfieri's tazza,-- The Libraries, the book on celestial phenomena,-- 779 Lactantius...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 612 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 612. p. 315 VI. THE ARTIST'S MATERIALS. Of chalk and paper (612--617).To make points [crayons] for colouring dry. Temper with a little wax and do not dry it; which wax you must dissolve with water: so that when the white lead is thus tempered, the water being distilled...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 711 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 711. THE MOULD FOR THE HORSE. Make the horse on legs of iron, strong and well set on a good foundation; then grease it and cover it with a coating, leaving each coat to dry thoroughly layer by layer; and this will thicken it by the breadth of three fingers. Now fix...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 7. p. 13 The Book of the science of Mechanics must precede the Book of useful inventions.--Have your books on anatomy bound! 4 FOOTNOTES 13:4 : 4. The numerous notes on anatomy written on loose leaves and now in the Royal collection at Windsor can best be classified...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 780. ON THE STRENGTH OF THE ARCH. The way to give stability to the arch is to fill the spandrils with good masonry up to the level of its summit. ON THE LOADING OF ROUND ARCHES. ON THE PROPER MANNER OF LOADING THE POINTED ARCH. ON THE EVIL EFFECTS OF LOADING THE POINTED...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1230 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1230. MAGNANIMITY. The falcon never preys but on large birds; and it will let itself die rather than feed on little ones, or eat stinking meat. VAIN GLORY. As regards this vice, we read that the peacock is more guilty of it than any other animal. For it is always...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 106 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 106. PERSPECTIVE. If two similar and equal objects are placed one beyond the other at a given distance the difference in their size will appear greater in proportion as they are p. 62 nearer to the eye that sees them. And conversely there will seem to be less difference...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 551 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 551. p. 278 HOW LIGHT SHOULD BE THROWN UPON FIGURES. The light must be arranged in accordance with the natural conditions under which you wish to represent your figures: that is, if you represent them in the sunshine make the shadows dark with large spaces of light...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 88 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 481. Of flower seeds.All the flowers which turn towards the sun perfect their seeds; but not the others; that is to say those which get only the reflection of the sun.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 313 "XX." "HUMOROUS WRITINGS." Just as Michaelangelo's occasional poems reflect his private life as well as the general disposition of his mind, we may find in the writings collected in this section, the transcript of Leonardo's fanciful nature, and we should...
Vol. I. Preface : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. xiii PREFACE. A singular fatality has ruled the destiny of nearly all the most famous of Leonardo da Vinci's works. Two of the three most important were never completed, obstacles having arisen during his life-time, which obliged him to leave them unfinished; namely...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 24. p. 20 ON PAINTING. Variability of the eye.1st. The pupil of the eye contracts, in proportion to the increase of light which is reflected in it. 2nd. The pupil of the eye expands in proportion to the diminution in the day light, or any other light, that is reflected...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1031 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1031. AT BORMIO. At Bormio are the baths;--About eight miles above Como is the Pliniana, which increases and ebbs every six hours, and its swell supplies water for two mills; and its ebbing makes the spring dry up; two miles higher up there is Nesso, a place where...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 792. p. 97 OF THE SUPPORTS. A pillar of which the thickness is increased will gain more than its due strength, in direct proportion to what its loses in relative height. EXAMPLE. If a pillar should be nine times as high as it is broad--that is to say, if it is one...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1162. p. 291 II. MORALS. What is life? (1162. 1163).Now you see that the hope and the desire of returning home and to one's former state is like the moth to the light, and that the man who with constant longing awaits with joy each new spring time, each new summer, each...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1330 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1330. p. 377 WHY DOGS TAKE PLEASURE IN SMELLING AT EACH OTHER. This animal has a horror of the poor, because they eat poor food, and it loves the rich, because they have good living and especially meat. And the excrement of animals always retains some virtue of its...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 71 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 468. OF THE SMOKE OF A TOWN. Smoke is seen better and more distinctly on the Eastern side than on the Western when the sun is in the East; and this arises from two causes; the first is that the sun, with its rays, shines through the particles of the smoke and lights...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 19. OF THE MISTAKES MADE BY THOSE WHO PRACTISE WITHOUT KNOWLEDGE. Necessity of theoretical knowledge (19. 20).Those who are in love with practice without knowledge are like the sailor who gets into a ship without rudder or compass and who never can be certain whether he...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 116 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 116. Let "a" be the light, "b" the eye, "c" the object seen by the eye and in the light. These show, first, the eye between p. 72 the light and the body; the 2nd, the light between the eye and the body; the 3rd the body between the eye and the light, "a" is the eye, "b"...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1554 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1554. Reverend Maestro, Domino Giovanni, I spoke to Maestro Zacaria as a brother about this business, and I made him satisfied with the arrangement that I had wished; that is, as regards the commission that I had from the parties and I say that between us there is no...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 222 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 222. p. 127 OF THE DIMINISHED DISTINCTNESS OF THE OUTLINES OF OPAQUE BODIES. Definition (222. 223).If the real outlines of opaque bodies are indistinguishable at even a very short distance, they will be more so at long distances; and, since it is by its outlines that we...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 22 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 313. ("a b") is equal to ("c d"). 135 FOOTNOTES 171:135 : See Pl. VII, No. 3. Reference may also be made here to two pen and ink drawings of heads in profile with figured measurements, of which there is no description in the MS. These are given on Pl. XVII, No. 2...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1338. BOOK 43. OF THE MOVEMENT OF AIR ENCLOSED IN WATER. Notes about events observed abroad (1338-1339).I have seen motions of the air so furious that they have carried, mixed up in their course, the largest trees of the forest and whole roofs of great palaces, and I...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1509 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1509. Inventories and accounts (1509-1545).On the 28th day of April I received from the Marchesino 103 lire and 12 dinari. 842 Ash. I. Ia] FOOTNOTES 454:842 : Instead of the indication of the year there is a blank space after d'aprile.--Marchesino Stange was one...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 705. Snow taken from the high peaks of mountains might be carried to hot places and let to fall at festivals in open places at summer time.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1273 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1273. p. 340 Some flames had already lasted in the furnace of a glass-blower, when they saw a candle approaching in a beautiful and glittering candlestick. With ardent longing they strove to reach it; and one of them, quitting its natural course, writhed up...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 512 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 512. OF THE PAINTER'S WINDOW AND ITS ADVANTAGE. The painter who works from nature should have a window, which he can raise p. 257 and lower. The reason is that sometimes you will want to finish a thing you are drawing, close to the light. Let "a b c d" be the chest...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 91 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 91. PERSPECTIVE. No surface can be seen exactly as it is, if the eye that sees it is not equally remote from all its edges.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 74 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1219. Why did nature not ordain that one animal should not live by the death of another? Nature, being inconstant and p. 311 taking pleasure in creating and making constantly new lives and forms, because she knows that her terrestrial materials become thereby augmented...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 651 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 651. p. 326 VII. PHILOSOPHY AND HISTORY OF THE ART OF PAINTING. The relation of art and nature (651. 652).What is fair in men, passes away, but not so in art.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1417 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1417. Borges 730 shall get for you the Archimedes from the bishop of Padua, and Vitellozzo the one from Borgo a San Sepolcro 731 FOOTNOTES 428:730 : Borges. A Spanish name. 428:731 : Borgo a San Sepolcro, where Luca Paciolo, Leonardo's friend, was born.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 76 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 76. The inversion of the images.All the images of objects which pass through a window [glass pane] from the free outer air to the air confined within walls, are seen on the opposite side; and an object which moves in the outer air from east to west will seem in its...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 208 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 208. THE MIRROR. Experiments with the mirror (208-210).If the illuminated object is of the same size as the luminous body and as that in which the light is reflected, the amount of the reflected light will bear the same proportion to the intermediate light as this...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1294 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1294. (Of Funeral Rites, and Processions, and Lights, and Bells, and Followers.) The greatest honours will be paid to men, and much pomp, without their knowledge. 659 FOOTNOTES 355:659 : A facsimile of this text is on Pl. CXVI below on the right, but the writing is...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 892 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 892. p. 154 III. THE MOON. OF THE MOON. On the luminousity of the moon (892-901).As I propose to treat of the nature of the moon, it is necessary that first I should describe the perspective of mirrors, whether plane, concave or convex; and first what is meant by...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 767 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 767. The cylinder of a body columnar in shape and its two opposite ends are two circles enclosed between parallel lines, and through the centre of the cylinder is a straight line, ending at the centre of these circles, and called by the ancients the axis. 396 FOOTNOTES...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 155 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 155. OF PAINTING. The outlines and form of any part of a body in light and shade are indistinct in the shadows and in the high lights; but in the portions between the light and the shadows they are highly conspicuous.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 835 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 835. WHY MEN ADVANCED IN AGE SEE BETTER AT A DISTANCE. Sight is better from a distance than near in those men who are advancing in age, because the same object transmits a smaller impression of itself to the eye when it is distant than when it is near.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 61 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 386. When two men are at the opposite ends of a plank that is balanced, and if they are of equal weight, and if one of them wants to make a leap into the air, then his leap will be made down from his end of the plank and the man will never go up again but must rem...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1517 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1517. How many braccia high is the level of the walls?-- 123 braccia How large is the hall? How large is the garland? 30 ducats. On the 29th day of January, 1494 cloth for hose lire 4 S 3 lining S 16 making S 8 to Salai S 3 a jasper ring S 13 a sparkling stone S 11...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1095 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1095. The Tigris passes through Asia Minor and brings with it the water of three lakes, one after the other of various elevations; the first being Munace and the middle Pallas and the lowest Triton. And the Nile again springs from three very high lakes in Ethiopi...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 275 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 275. ANY SHADOW CAST BY AN OPAQUE BODY SMALLER THAN THE LIGHT CAUSING THE SHADOW WILL THROW A DERIVED SHADOW WHICH IS TINGED BY THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT. On the colours of derived shadows (275. 276).Let "n" be the source of the shadow "e f"; it will assume its hue. Let...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1072 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1072. The Rhone issues from the lake of Geneva and flows first to the West and then to the South, with a course of 400 miles and pours its waters into the Mediterranean.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1409 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1409. Paolo said that no machine that moves another... 724 FOOTNOTES 426:724 : The passage, of which, the beginning is here given, deals with questions in mechanics. The instances in which Leonardo quotes the opinions of his contemporaries on scientific matters are so...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 216 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 216. That part of the surface of a body on which the images [reflection] from other bodies placed opposite fall at the largest angle will assume their hue most strongly. In the diagram below, 8 is a larger angle than 4, since its base "a n" is larger than "e n" the base...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 875 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 875. The waves in water magnify the image of an object reflected in it. Let "a" be the sun, and "n m" the ruffled water, "b" the image of the sun when the water is smooth. Let "f" be the eye which sees the image in all the waves included within the base of the triangle...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 68 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 68. That the contrary is impossible.It is impossible that the eye should project from itself, by visual rays, the visual virtue, since, as soon as it opens, that front portion [of the eye] which would give rise to this emanation would have to go forth to the object...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 449. OBJECTS IN HIGH LIGHT SHOW BUT LITTLE, BUT BETWEEN LIGHT AND SHADOW THEY STAND OUT WELL. The effects of midday light.To represent a landscape choose that the sun shall be at noon and look towards the West or East and then draw. And if you turn towards the North...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 271 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 271. OF PAINTING. The surface of a body assumes in some degree the hue of those around it. The colours of illuminated objects are reflected from the surfaces of one to the other in various spots, according to the various positions of those objects. Let "o" be a blue...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 65 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 382. p. 198 OF PAINTING. If you have to draw a man who is in motion, or lifting or pulling, or carrying a weight equal to his own, in what way must you set on his legs below his body? 189 FOOTNOTES 198:189 : In the MS. this question remains unanswered.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1269 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1269. A FABLE. A rat was besieged in his little dwelling by a weasel, which with unwearied vigilance awaited his surrender, while watching his imminent peril through a little hole. Meanwhile the cat came by and suddenly seized the weasel and forthwith devoured it. Then...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1362. And so may it please our great Author that I may demonstrate the nature of man and his customs, in the way I describe his figure. 692 FOOTNOTES 414:692 : A preparatory note for the passage given as No. 798, ll. 41--42.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1091 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1091. The Red Sea. (1091. 1092). For a long time the water of the Mediterranean flowed out through the Red Sea, which is 100 miles wide and 1500 long, and full of reefs; and it has worn away the sides of Mount Sinai, a fact which testifies, not to an inundati...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1513 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1513 The narrow cornice above the hall lire 30. The cornice beneath that, being one for each picture, lire 7, and for the cost of blue, gold, white, plaster, indigo and glue 3 lire; time 3 days. The pictures below these mouldings with their pilasters, 12 lire each. I...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 683. Ivy is [a type] of longevity. 321 FOOTNOTES 356:321 : In the original there is, near this text, a sketch of a coat wreathed above the waist with ivy.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 763 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 763. The water should be allowed to fall from the whole circle "a b". 392 FOOTNOTES 70:392 : Other drawings of fountains are given on Pl. CI (W. XX); the original is a pen and ink drawing on blue paper; on Pl. CIII (MS. B.) and Pl. LXXXII.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 151 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 151. p. 89 That portion of an illuminated object which is nearest to the source of light will be the most strongly illuminated.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 896 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 896. p. 157 OF THE MOON. The moon has no light in itself; but so much of it as faces the sun is illuminated, and of that illumined portion we see so much as faces the earth. And the moon's night receives just as much light as is lent it by our waters as they reflect...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 508 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 508. A WAY OF DEVELOPING AND AROUSING THE MIND TO VARIOUS INVENTIONS. I cannot forbear to mention among these precepts a new device for study which, although it may seem but trivial and almost ludicrous, is nevertheless extremely useful in arousing the mind to various...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 871 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 871. "a b" is the aperture through which the sun passes, and if you could measure the size of the solar rays at "n m", you could accurately trace the real lines of the convergence of the solar rays, the mirror being at "a b", and then show the reflected rays at p. 143...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 212 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 212. OF THE MOTION OF SHADOWS. The motion of a shadow is always more rapid than that of the body which produces it if the light is stationary. To prove this let "a" be the luminous body, and "b" the body casting the shadow, and "d" the shadow. Then I say th...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 1 "I." "PROLEGOMENA AND GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK ON PAINTING." "CLAVIS SIGILLORUM." 1. "In the few instances in which Leonardo has written from left to right in the ordinary way this is stated in a note. In all other cases the writing is backwards". 2. "...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 36 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 445. p. 224 OF THE 4 POINTS OF THE COMPASS [IN LANDSCAPES]. When the sun is in the East all the portions of plants lighted by it are of a most lively verdure, and this happens because the leaves lighted by the sun within the half of the horizon that is the Eastern half...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 799 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 799. p. 112 THE ARRANGEMENT OF ANATOMY First draw the bones, let us say, of the arm, and put in the motor muscle from the shoulder to the elbow with all its lines. Then proceed in the same way from the elbow to the wrist. Then from the wrist to the hand ...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1076 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1076. As to whether it is better that the water should all be raised in a single turn or in two? The answer is that in one single turn the wheel could not support all the water that it can raise in two turns, because at the half turn of the wheel it would be raising 100...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 516 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 516. p. 258 THE KIND OF LIGHT REQUISITE FOR PAINTING LIGHT AND SHADE. An object will display the greatest difference of light and shade when it is seen in the strongest light, as by sunlight, or, at night, by the light of a fire. But this should not be much used...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 95 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 95. p. 58 Among objects of equal size that which is most remote from the eye will look the smallest. 47 FOOTNOTES 58:47 : This axiom, sufficiently clear in itself, is in the original illustrated by a very large diagram, constructed like that here reproduced under No...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 888 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 888. Take the measure of the sun at the solstice in mid-June.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 36 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 701. Ingratitude. 329 FOOTNOTES 360:329 : See Pl. LX, No. 4. Below the bottom sketches are the unintelligible words "sta stilli"." For "Ingratitudo" compare also Nos. 686 and 687.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1377. p. 417 The Magnifico Giuliano de' Medici left Rome on the 9th of January 1515, just at daybreak, to take a wife in Savoy; and on the same day fell the death of the king of France. 704 FOOTNOTES 417:704 : Giuliano de Medici, brother to Pope Leo X.; see note to Nos...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1277 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1277. A FABLE. A nut, having been carried by a crow to the top of a tall campanile and released by falling into a chink from the mortal grip of its beak, it prayed the wall by the grace bestowed on it by God in allowing it to be so high and thick, and to own such fine...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1068 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1068. A spring may be seen to rise in Sicily which at certain times of the year throws out chesnut leaves in quantities; but in Sicily chesnuts do not grow, hence it is evident that that spring must issue from some abyss in Italy and then flow beneath the sea to break...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1290 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1290. p. 352 A JEST. A sick man finding himself in "articulo mortis" heard a knock at the door, and asking one of his servants who was knocking, the servant went out, and answered that it was a woman calling herself Madonna Bona. Then the sick man lifting his arms...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 288 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 288. p. 153 WHETHER THE COLOURS OF THE RAINBOW ARE PRODUCED BY THE SUN. The colours of the rainbow are not produced by the sun, for they occur in many ways without the sunshine; as may be seen by holding a glass of water up to the eye; when, in the glass--where there...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 395. Every year when the boughs of a plant [or tree] have made an end of maturing their growth, they will have made, when put together, a thickness equal to that of the main stem; and at every stage of its ramification you will find the thickness of the said main stem;...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 72 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 72. The practice of perspective (72. 73).In the practice of perspective the same rules apply to light and to the eye.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 70 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1213. Of all human opinions that is to be reputed the most foolish which deals with the belief in Necromancy, the sister of Alchemy, which gives birth to simple and natural things. But it is all the more worthy of reprehension than alchemy, because it brings forth...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1413 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1413. Near to Cordusio is Pier Antonio da Tossano and his brother Serafino. 726 FOOTNOTES 427:726 : This note is written between lines 23 and 24 of the text No. 710. Corduso, Cordusio (curia ducis) = Cordus in the Milanese dialect, is the name of a Piazza between...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 655 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 655. THAT SCULPTURE IS LESS INTELLECTUAL THAN PAINTING, AND LACKS MANY CHARACTERISTICS OF NATURE. Painting is superior to sculpture (655. 656).I myself, having exercised myself no less in sculpture than in painting and doing both one and the other in the same degree, it...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 23. OF THE 10 ATTRIBUTES OF THE EYE, ALL CONCERNED IN PAINTING. Painting is concerned with all the 10 attributes of sight; which are:--Darkness, Light, Solidity and Colour, Form and Position, Distance and Propinquity, Motion and Rest. This little work of mine will be...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. Part 02 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " IV. PERSPECTIVE OF DISAPPEARANCE Introduction 222. 223. 224. 225. 226. 227. 228. 229. 230. 231. 232. 233. 234. 235. 236. 237. 238. 239. 240. 241. 242. 243. 244. 245. 246. 247. 248. 249. 250. 251. 252. 253. 254. 255. 256. 257. 258. 259. 260. 261. 262.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1334 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1334. TRICKS OF DIVIDING. Take in each hand an equal number; put 4 from the right hand into the left; cast away the remainder; cast away an equal number from the left hand; add 5, and now you will find 13 in this [left] hand; that is--I made you put 4 from the right...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 608 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 608. OF THE DELUGE AND HOW TO REPRESENT IT IN A PICTURE. Let the dark and gloomy air be seen buffeted by the rush of contrary winds and p. 307 dense from the continued rain mingled with hail and bearing hither and thither an infinite number of branches torn...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 100 REMARKS ON THE STYLE OF LEONARDO'S ARCHITECTURE. A few remarks may here be added on the style of Leonardo's architectural studies. However incomplete, however small in scale, they allow us to establish a certain number of facts and probabilities, well worthy...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1035 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1035. Made by the sea at Piombino. 560 FOOTNOTES 240:560 : Below the sketch there are eleven lines of text referring to the motion of waves.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 226 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 226. An experiment.When I was once in a place on the sea, at an equal distance from the shore and the mountains, the distance from the shore looked much greater than that from the mountains.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1550 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1550. p. 465 To Monna Margarita S 5 to Tomaso S 14 to Monna Margarita d 5 S 2 on the day of San Zanobi left..... after payment d 13 S 2 d 4 of Monna Margarita altogether d 14 S 5 d 4
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 309. If a man 2 braccia high is too small, one of four is too tall, the medium being what is admirable. Between 2 and 4 comes 3; therefore take a man of 3 braccia in height and measure him by the rule I will give you. If you tell me that I may be mistaken, and judge...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 112 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 112. Different principles and plans of treatment (112--116).First I will treat of light falling through windows which I will call Restricted [Light] and then I will treat of light in the open country, to which I will give the name of diffused Light. Then I will tre...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 616 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 616. This paper should be painted over with candle soot tempered with thin glue, then smear the leaf thinly with white lead in oil as is done to the letters in printing, and then print in the ordinary way. Thus the leaf will appear shaded in the hollows and lighted...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1450 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1450. p. 436 Giuliano Condi,-- 774 , As he was 59 years old in 1480, he certainly would not have been alive at the time of Leonardo's death. But Leonardo must have been on intimate terms with the family till the end of his life, for in a letter dated June 1. 1519...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 950 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 950. On the formation of Gulfs (950. 951).All inland seas and the gulfs of those seas, are made by rivers which flow into the sea.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 33 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1171. Learning acquired in youth arrests the evil of old age; and if you understand that old age has wisdom for its food, you will so conduct yourself in youth that your old age will not lack for nourishment.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 715 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 715. p. 14 METHOD OF FOUNDING AGAIN. This may be done when the furnace is made 339 strong and bruised. 7l6. Models for the horse of the Sforza monument (716-718).Messer Galeazzo's big genet FOOTNOTES 14:339 : this note is written below the sketches.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 555 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 555. OF THE TREATMENT OF THE LIGHTS. First give a general shadow to the whole of that extended part which is away from the light. Then put in the half shadows and the strong shadows, comparing them with each other and, in the same way give the extended light in half...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1234 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1234. CHASTITY. The turtle-dove is never false to its mate; and if one dies the other preserves perpetual chastity, and never again sits on a green bough, nor ever again drinks of clear water. UNCHASTITY. The bat, owing to unbridled lust, observes no universal rule...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 38 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 355. p. 188 The movement of the torso (355-361).Observe the altered position of the shoulder in all the movements of the arm, going up and down, inwards and outwards, to the back and to the front, and also in circular movements and any others. And do the same with...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 102 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 102. I GIVE THE DEGREES OF THE OBJECTS SEEN BY THE EYE AS THE MUSICIAN DOES THE NOTES HEARD BY THE EAR. Although the objects seen by the eye do, in fact, touch each other as they recede, I will nevertheless found my rule on spaces of 20 p. 61 braccia each; as a musici...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 238 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 238. OF LIGHT AND SHADE. You who draw from nature, look (carefully) at the extent, the degree, and the form of the lights and shadows on each muscle; and in their position lengthwise observe towards which muscle the axis of the central line is directed.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1021 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1021. I have already been to see a great variety (of atmospheric effects). And lately over Milan towards Lago Maggiore I saw a p. 235 cloud in the form of an immense mountain full of rifts of glowing light, because the rays of the sun, which was already close...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1178. It seems to me that men of coarse and clumsy habits and of small knowledge do not deserve such fine instruments nor so great a variety of natural mechanism as men of speculation and of great knowledge; but merely a p. 295 sack in which their food may be stowed...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 9. INTRODUCTION. General introductions to the book on Painting (9-13).Seeing that I can find no subject specially useful or pleasing--since the men who have come before me have taken for their own every useful or necessary theme--I must do like one who, being po...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 61 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 478. On images reflected in water.Painters often deceive themselves, by representing water in which they make the water reflect the objects seen by the man. But the water reflects the object from one side and the man sees it from the other; and it often happens th...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 86 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 452. The cast shadow of trees (452. 453).The image of the shadow of any object of uniform breadth can never be [exactly] the same as that of the body which casts it. 222 FOOTNOTES 227:222 : See Pl. XXVIII, No. 5.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 361. OF [CHANGE OF] ATTITUDE. The pit of the throat is over the feet, and by throwing one arm forward the pit of the throat is thrown off that foot. And if the leg is thrown forward the pit of the throat is thrown forward; and. so it varies in every attitude.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1544 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1544. Hose S 40 straw S 60 wheat S 42 wine S 54 bread S 18 meat S 54 eggs S 5 salad S 3 the Barber S 2 d 6 horses S 1
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 232 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 232. p. 131 On indistinctness at great distances (232-234).Objects near to the eye will appear larger than those at a distance. Objects seen with two eyes will appear rounder than if they are seen with only one. Objects seen between light and shadow will show the most...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 108 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 108. Here follows what is wanting in the margin at the foot on the other side of this page. Natural perspective acts in a contrary way; for, at greater distances the object seen appears smaller, and at a smaller distance the object appears larger. But this said...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1164. Death.Every evil leaves behind a grief in our memory, except the supreme evil, that is death, which destroys this memory together with life.
Vol. Ii. List Of Illustrations In Volume Ii : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. xi All drawings here reproduced are in pen and ink, unless otherwise stated. The reproductions are of the exact size of the originals, except that Plates LXVI, XCVIII, CVII, CIX, CXI No. 1, CXII, CXIII, CXIV, CXVI, CXVII, CXVIII and CXXII are reduced, and Plate CXIX...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 602 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 602. and with the opposite limbs thrust forward; that is where a man puts forward the right foot the left arm must be advanced. And if you make any one fallen, you must show the place where he has slipped and been dragged along the dust into blood stained mire;...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 944 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 944. p. 187 THE OPINION OF SOME PERSONS WHO SAY THAT THE WATER OF SOME SEAS IS HIGHER THAN THE HIGHEST SUMMITS OF MOUNTAINS; AND NEVERTHELESS THE WATER WAS FORCED UP TO THESE SUMMITS. Water would not move from place to place if it were not that it seeks the lowest level...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1444 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1444. Pandolfino's book 758 ,--knives,--a pen for ruling,--to have the vest dyed,--The library at St.-Mark's,--The library at Santo Spirito,--Lactantius of the Daldi 759 ,--Antonio Covoni,--A book by Maestro Paolo Infermieri, --Boots, shoes and hose,--(Shell)lac...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. Ix : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " IX. THE PRACTICE OF PAINTING Introduction 482. 483. 484. 485. 486. 487. 488. 489. 490. 491. 492. 493. 494. 495. 496. 497. 498. 499. 500. 501. 502. 503. 504. 505. 506. 507. 508. 509. 510. 511. 512. 513. 514. 515. 516. 517. 518. 519. 520. 521. 522. 523. 524. 525. 526. 527...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 17. ON THE SECTIONS OF [THE BOOK ON] PAINTING. The first thing in painting is that the objects it represents should appear in relief, and that the grounds surrounding them at different distances shall appear within the vertical plane of the foreground of the picture by...
Vol. Ii. Duplicate Plates. Duplicate Plates : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " DUPLICATE PLATES (VOL. II) Note Plate I Plate IX Plate XIII Plate XXII Plate XXIII Plate XXIV Plate XXXIV Plate XXXV Plate XXXVIII Plate XLI Plate XLIII Plate LVIII Plate LXII Plate LXIV
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 173 XVI. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. Leonardo's researches as to the structure of the earth and sea were made at a time, when the extended voyages of the Spaniards and Portuguese had also excited a special interest in geographical questions in Italy, and particularly...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 790. The heaviest part of the foundations of buildings settles most, and leaves the lighter part above it separated from it. And the soil which is most pressed, if it be porous yields most. You should always make the foundations project equally beyond the weight...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1220 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1220. p. 315 I. STUDIES ON THE LIFE AND HABITS OF ANIMALS. THE LOVE OF VIRTUE. The gold-finch is a bird of which it is related that, when it is carried into the presence of a sick person, if the sick man is going to die, the bird turns away its head and never looks...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 541 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 541. OF DRAWING FROM RELIEF. In drawing from the round the draughtsman should so place himself that the eye of the figure he is drawing is on a level with his own. This should be done with any head he may have to represent from nature because, without excepti...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 118 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 118. OF LIGHT. The lights which may illuminate opaque bodies are of 4 kinds. These are: diffused light as that of the atmosphere, within our horizon. And Direct, as that of the sun, or of a window or door or other opening. The third is Reflected light; and there is...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 882 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 882. Epicurus says the sun is the size it looks. Hence as it looks about a foot across we must consider that to be its size; it would follow that when the moon eclipses the sun, the sun ought not to appear the larger, as it does. Then, the moon being smaller th...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 145 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 145. OF THE DIFFERENT LIGHT AND SHADE IN VARIOUS ASPECTS AND OF OBJECTS PLACED IN THEM. If the sun is in the East and you look towards the West you will see every thing in full light and totally without shadow because you see them from the same side as the sun: and if...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1507 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1507. Vitolone, at Saint Mark's. 840 K.2 12b} FOOTNOTES 453:840 : Altro codice di cotesta 'Prospettiva' del Vitolone troviamo notato nel 'Canone bibliographico di Nicolo V', conservato alla, Magliabecchiana, in copia dell' originale verosimilmente inviato dal...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1085 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1085. The gulf of the Mediterranean, as an inland sea, received the principal waters of Africa, Asia and Europe that flowed towards it; and its waters came up to the foot of the mountains that surrounded it and made its shores. And the summits of the Apennines stood up...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 71 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 375. Of walking up and down (375-379)When a man wants to stop running and check the impetus he is forced to hang back and take short quick steps. 182 The centre of gravity of a man who lifts one of his feet from the ground always rests on the centre of the sole...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 825 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 825. Note on the bendings of joints and in what way the flesh grows upon them in their flexions or extensions; and of this most important study write a separate treatise: in the description of the movements of animals with four feet; among which is man, who likewise...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 265 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 265. A shadow is always affected by the colour of the surface on which it is cast.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 282 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 282. p. 151 PERSPECTIVE. That side of an object in light and shade which is towards the light transmits the images of its details more distinctly and immediately to the eye than the side which is in shadow. PERSPECTIVE. The solar rays reflected on a square mirror will...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1062 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1062. Bridge of Goertz-Wilbach (?). 580 FOOTNOTES 246:580 : There is a slight sketch with this text, Leonardo seems to have intended to suggest, with a few pen-strokes, the course of the Isonzo and of the Wipbach in the vicinity of Gorizia (Goerz). He himself says...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 919 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 919. p. 175 I. INTRODUCTION. Schemes for the arrangement of the materials (919-928). These books contain in the beginning: Of the nature of water itself in its motions; the others treat of the effects of its currents, which change the world in its centre and its shape.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 865 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 865. How to prove that the earth is a planet (865-867).That the earth is a star.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 78 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 78. Necessity has provided that all the images of objects in front of the eye shall intersect in two places. One of these intersections is in the pupil, the other in the crystalline lens; and if this were not the case the eye could not see so great a number of objects...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 206 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 206. PERSPECTIVE. Reflection on water (206. 207).The shadow or object mirrored in water in motion, that is to say in small wavelets, will always be larger than the external object producing it.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1263 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1263. Moderation checks all the vices. The ermine will die rather than besmirch itself. OF FORESIGHT. The cock does not crow till it has thrice flapped its wings; the parrot in moving among boughs never puts its feet excepting where it has first put its beak. Vows are...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 22 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 689. Thus are base unions sundered. 324 FOOTNOTES 358:324 : A much blurred sketch is on the page by this text. It seems to represent an unravelled plait or tissue.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 33 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1370. On the 2nd of April 1489, book entitled 'Of the human figure'. 697 FOOTNOTES 415:697 : While the letters in the MS. notes of 1473 and 1478 are very ornate, this note and the texts on anatomy on the same sheet (for instance No. 805) are in the same simple h...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1519 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1519. Parsley 10 parts mint 1 part thyme 1 part Vinegar... and a little salt two pieces of canvas for Salai. 843 FOOTNOTES 456:843 : This note, of about the year 1494, is the earliest mention of Salai, and the last is of the year 1513 (see No. 1465, 3). From the various...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 81 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 81. HOW THE INNUMERABLE RAYS FROM INNUMERABLE IMAGES CAN CONVERGE TO A POINT. Just as all lines can meet at a point without interfering with each other--being without breadth or thickness--in the same way all the images of surfaces can meet there; and as each given...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 502 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 502. HOW, IN IMPORTANT WORKS, A MAN SHOULD NOT TRUST ENTIRELY TO HIS MEMORY WITHOUT CONDESCENDING TO DRAW FROM NATURE. A caution against one-sided study.Any master who should venture to boast that he could remember all the forms and effects of nature would certainly...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 769 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 769. CONCERNING ARCHITRAVES OF ONE OR SEVERAL PIECES. An architrave of several pieces is stronger than that of one single piece, if those pieces are placed with their length in the direction of the centre of the world. This is proved because stones have their gr...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1407 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1407. I ask at what part of its curved motion the moving cause will leave the thing moved and moveable. Speak to Pietro Monti of these methods of throwing spears.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 641 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 641. MOULD(?). The mould (?) may be of Venus, or of Jupiter and Saturn and placed frequently in the fire. And it should be worked with fine emery and the mould (?) should be of Venus and Jupiter impasted over (?) Venus. But first you will test Venus and Mercury mixed...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 64 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1205. p. 301 III. POLEMICS.--SPECULATION. Against Speculators (1205. 1206).Oh! speculators on things, boast not of knowing the things that nature ordinarily brings about; but rejoice if you know the end of those things which you yourself devise.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 218 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 218. In all the proportions I lay down it must be understood that the medium between the bodies is always the same. The smaller the luminous body the more distinct will the transmission of the shadows be. When of two opposite shadows, produced by the same body, one is...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 66 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 66. The images of objects are all diffused through the atmosphere which receives them; and all on every side in it. To prove this, let a c e be objects of which the images are admitted to a dark chamber by the small holes "n p" and thrown upon the plane "f i" opposite...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1284 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1284. Franciscan begging Friars are wont, at certain times, to keep fasts, when they do not eat meat in their convents. But on journeys, as they live on charity, they have license to eat whatever is set before them. Now a couple of these friars on their travels, stopped...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 85 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 85. PERSPECTIVE. The vertical plane is a perpendicular line, imagined as in front of the central point where the apex of the pyramids converge. And this plane bears the same relation to this point as a plane of glass would, through which you might see the various...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 898 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 898. WHAT SORT OF THING THE MOON IS. The moon is not of itself luminous, but is highly fitted to assimilate the character of light after the manner of a mirror, or of water, or of any other reflecting body; and it grows larger in the East and in the West, like the sun...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 506 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 506. PAINTING. The mind of the painter must resemble a mirror, which always takes the colour of the object it reflects and is completely occupied by the images of as many objects as are in front of it. Therefore you must know, Oh Painter! that you cannot be a good one...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1267 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1267. p. 336 A FABLE. A dog, lying asleep on the fur of a sheep, one of his fleas, perceiving the odour of the greasy wool, judged that this must be a land of better living, and also more secure from the teeth and nails of the dog than where he fed on the dog;...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. V. Theory Of Colours : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " V. THEORY OF COLOURS Introduction 263. 264. 265. 266. 267. 268. 269. 270. 271. 272. 273. 274. 275. 276. 277. 278. 279. 280. 281. 282. 283. 284. 285. 286. 287. 288.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 37 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1364. [When I did well, as a boy you used to put me in prison. Now if I do it being grown up, you will do worse to me.]
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 685. Movement will cease before we are weary of being useful. Movement will fail sooner than usefulness. Death sooner than I am never weary of weariness. being useful, In serving others I is a motto for carnval. cannot do enough. Without fatigue. No labour is sufficient...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1280 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1280. p. 347 III. JESTS AND TALES. A JEST. A priest, making the rounds of his parish on Easter Eve, and sprinkling holy water in the houses as is customary, came to a painter's room, where he sprinkled the water on some of his pictures. The painter turned round...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 307. p. 166 OF PAINTING. Of various colours which are none of them blue that which at a great distance will look bluest is the nearest to black; and so, conversely, the colour which is least like black will at a great distance best preserve its own colour. Hence...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1078 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1078. A trabocco is four braccia, and one mile is three thousand of the said braccia. Each braccio is divided into 12 inches; and the water in the canals has a fall in every hundred trabocchi of two of these inches; therefore 14 inches of fall are necessary in two...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 21 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XVIII. NAVAL WARFARE. MECHANICAL APPLIANCES. MUSIC. Introduction 1113. 1114. 1115. 1116. 1117. 1118. 1119. 1120. 1121. 1122. 1123. 1124. 1125. 1126. 1127. 1128. 1129. 1130. 1131.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 62 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 62. Every point is the termination of an infinite number of lines, which diverge to form a base, and immediately, from the base the same lines converge to a pyramid [imaging] both the colour and form. No sooner is a form created or compounded than suddenly infinite...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 38 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 443. FROM WHENCE TO DEPICT A LANDSCAPE Landscapes should be represented so that the trees may be half in light and half in shadow; but it is better to do them when the sun is covered with clouds, for then the trees are lighted by the general light of the sky...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 645 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 645. Very thin glass may be cut with scissors and when placed over inlaid work of bone, gilt, or stained of other colours you can saw it through together with the bone and then put it together and it will retain a lustre that will not be scratched nor worn away by...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 60 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1195. p. 298 A SIMILE FOR PATIENCE. Patience serves us against insults precisely as clothes do against the cold. For if you multiply your garments as the cold increases, that cold cannot hurt you; in the same way increase your patience under great offences, and they...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 797 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 797. OF THE ORDER OF THE BOOK. Plans and suggestions for the arrangement of materials (797-802).This work must begin with the conception of man, and describe the nature of the womb and how the foetus lives in it, up to what stage it resides there, and in what way it...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1375. Begun at Milan on the l2th of September 1508. 702 FOOTNOTES 416:702 : No. 1528 and No. 1529 belong to the same year. The text Vol. I, No. 4 belongs to the following year 1509 (1508 old style); so also does No. 1009.-- Nos. 1022, 1057 and 1464 belong to 1511.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1081 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1081. The Germans are wont to annoy a garrison with the smoke of feathers, sulphur and realgar, and they make this smoke last 7 or 8 hours. Likewise the husks of wheat make a great and lasting smoke; and also dry dung; but this must be mixed with olive husks, that is...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1503 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1503. of double the diameter cannot be moved by double the exertion, be- cause the superficies of a body of the same form but twice as large has four times the extent of the superficies of the smaller, as is shown in the two figures a and n.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 821 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 821. Of the way in which the tail of a fish acts in propelling the fish; as in the eel, snake and leech. 426 FOOTNOTES 119:426 : A sketch of a fish, swimming upwards is in the original, inserted above this text.--Compare No. 1114.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1279 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1279. The hapless willow, finding that she could not enjoy the pleasure of seeing her slender branches grow or attain to the height she wished, or point to the sky, by reason of the vine and whatever other trees that grew near, but was always maimed and lopped...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 141 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 141. Light and shadow with regard to the position of the eye (141--145).Every shaded body that is larger than the pupil and that interposes between the luminous body and the eye will be seen dark. When the eye is placed between the luminous body and the objects...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 518 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 518. p. 259 OF THE QUALITY OF LIGHT. In proportion to the number of times that "a b" goes into "c d" will it be more luminous than "c d". And similarly, in proportion as the point "e" goes into "c d" will it be more luminous than "c d;" and this light is useful...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 886 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 886. Considerations as to the size of the sun (886-891).The sun does not move. 462 FOOTNOTES 152:462 : This sentence occurs incidentally among mathematical notes, and is written in unusually large letters.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 397. There is no boss on branches which has not been produced by some branch which has failed. The lower shoots on the branches of trees grow more than the upper ones and this occurs only because the sap that nourishes them, being heavy, tends downwards more th...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 202 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 202. The shadow cast by an object on a plane will be smaller in proportion as that object is lighted by feebler rays. Let "d e" be the object and "d c" the plane surface; the number of times that d e will go into "f g" gives the proportion of light at "f h" to d c...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 861 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 861. Let the earth turn on which side it may the surface of the waters will never move from its spherical form, but will always remain equidistant from the centre of the globe. Granting that the earth might be removed from the centre of the globe, what would happen...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 67 "III." "SIX BOOKS ON LIGHT AND SHADE." "Linear Perspective cannot be immediately followed by either the" "prospettiva de' perdimenti or the prospettiva de' colori" or the aerial perspective; since these branches of the subject presuppose a knowledge...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1066 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1066. p. 248 A method for drying the marsh of Piombino. 583 FOOTNOTES 248:583 : There is a slight sketch with this text in the original.--Piombino is also mentioned in Nos. 609, l. 55-58 (compare Pl. XXXV, 3, below). Also in No. 1035.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 286 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 286. OF PAINTING. Colours seen in shadow will display more or less of their natural brilliancy in proportion as they are in fainter or deeper shadow. But if these same colours are situated in a well-lighted place, they will appear brighter in proportion as the light is...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1154. Instrumental or mechanical science is of all the noblest and the most useful, seeing that by means of this all animated bodies that have movement perform all their actions; and these movements are based on the centre of gravity which is placed in the middle...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 940 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 940. PROVES HOW THE EARTH IS NOT GLOBULAR AND NOT BEING GLOBULAR CANNOT HAVE A COMMON CENTRE. We see the Nile come from Southern regions and traverse various provinces, running towards the North for a distance of p. 185 [paragraph continues] 3000 miles and flow ...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 606 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 606. HOW TO REPRESENT A TEMPEST. If you wish to represent a tempest consider and arrange well its effects as seen, when the wind, blowing over the face of the sea and earth, removes and carries with it such things as are not fixed to the general mass. And to represent...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 545 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 545. If you cannot arrange that those who look at your work should stand at one particular point, when constructing your work, stand back until your eye is at least 20 times as far off as the greatest height and width of your work. This will make so little difference...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1224 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1224. INGRATITUDE. Pigeons are a symbol of ingratitude; for when they are old enough no longer to need to be fed, they begin to fight with their father, and this struggle does not end until the young one drives the father out and takes the hen and makes her his own...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 167 "VII." "ON THE PROPORTIONS AND ON THE MOVEMENTS OF THE HUMAN FIGURE." Leonardo's researches on the proportions and movements of the human figure must have been for the most part completed and written before the year 1498; for LUCA PACIOLO writes...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 13. Among all the studies of natural causes and reasons Light chiefly delights the beholder; and among the great features of Mathematics p. 16 the certainty of its demonstrations is what preeminently (tends to) elevate the mind of the investigator. Perspective...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 618 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 618. On the preparation and use of colours (618-627).To make a fine green take green and mix it with bitumen and you will make the shadows darker. Then, for lighter [shades] green with yellow ochre, and for still lighter green with yellow, and for the high lights pure...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1324 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1324. Schemes for prophecies (1324-1329).The knife, which is an artificial weapon, deprives man of his nails, his natural weapons. The mirror conducts itself haughtily holding mirrored in itself the Queen. When she departs the mirror remains there...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1025 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1025. The vineyards of Vigevano on the 20th day of March 1494. 551 FOOTNOTES 236:551 : On one side there is an effaced sketch in red chalk.
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 786. ON THE STRENGTH AND NATURE OF ARCHES, AND WHERE THEY ARE STRONG OR WEAK; AND THE SAME AS TO COLUMNS. That part of the arch which is nearer to the horizontal offers least resistance to the weight placed on it. p. 92 When the triangle "a z n", by settling, drives...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 36 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 357. OF THE LOINS, WHEN BENT. The loins or backbone being bent. The breasts are are always lower than the shoulderblades of the back. If the breast bone is arched the breasts are higher than the shoulderblades. If the loins are upright the breast will always be found...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 236 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 236. OF PAINTING. When you represent in your work shadows which you can only discern with difficulty, and of which you cannot distinguish the edges so that you apprehend them confusedly, you must not make them sharp or definite lest your work should have a wooden effect.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1540 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1540. p. 461 20 pounds of German blue, at one ducat the pound lire 80 S d 60 pounds of white, S.. the pound lire 15 S d 1 1/2 pound at 48 the pound lire 6 S d 2 pounds of cinnabar at S 18 the pound lire 1 S 16 d 6 pounds of green at S 12 the pound lire 3 S 12 d 4 pounds...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 82 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 456. That part of a tree which has shadow for background, is all of one tone, and wherever the trees or branches are thickest they will be darkest, because there are no little intervals of air. But where the boughs lie against a background of other boughs, the brighter...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 316. From "a" to "b"--that is to say from the roots of the hair in front to the top of the head--ought to be equal to "c d";--that is from the bottom of the nose to the meeting of the lips in the middle of the mouth. From the inner corner of the eye "m" to the top...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 114 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 114. OF PAINTING. This is another section: that is, of the nature of a reflection (from) an object placed between the eye and the light under various aspects.
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 21. p. 19 INTRODUCTION TO PERSPECTIVE:--THAT IS OF THE FUNCTION OF THE EYE. The function of the eye (21-23).Behold here O reader! a thing concerning which we cannot trust our forefathers, the ancients, who tried to define what the Soul and Life are--which are beyond...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 73 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 466. Of the houses of a town, in which the divisions between the houses may be distinguished by the light which fall on the mist at the bottom. If the eye is above the houses the light seen in the space that is between one house and the next sinks by degrees...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 948 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 948. The characteristics of sea water (948. 949).The waters of the salt sea are fresh at the greatest depths.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1448 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1448. An algebra, which the Marliani have, written by their father, 763 -- On the bone, by the Marliani,-- On the bone which penetrates, Gian Giacomo of Bellinzona, to draw out the nail with facility,-- The measurement of Boccalino,-- The measurement of Mil...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1332 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1332. Irony (1332).If Petrarch was so fond of bay, it was because it is of a good taste in sausages and with tunny; I cannot put any value on their foolery. 667 FOOTNOTES 377:667 : Conte Porro has published these lines in the Archivio Stor. Lombarda VIII, IV; he reads...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1033 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1033. At Santa Maria in the Valley of Ravagnate 557 in the mountains of Brianza are the rods of chestnuts of 9 braccia and one out of an average of 100 will be 14 braccia. At Varallo di Ponbia near to Sesto on the Ticino the quinces are white, large and hard. 558...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 553 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 553. OF SITUATION. Remember [to note] the situation of your figures; for the light and shade will be one thing if the object is in a dark place with a particular light, and another thing if it is in a light place with direct sunlight; one thing in a dark place with...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 104 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 104. The differences in the diminution of objects of equal size in consequence of their various remoteness from the eye will bear among themselves the same proportions as those of the spaces between the eye and the different objects. Find out how much a man diminishes...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1548 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1548. p. 464 On the morning of Santo Zanobio the 29th of May 1504, I had from Lionardo Vinci 15 gold ducats and began to spend them. to Mona Margarita S 62 d 4 to remake the ring S 19 d 8 clothes S 13 good beef S 4 eggs S 6 debt at the bank S 7 velvet S 12 wine S 6 d 4...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1232 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1232. INCONTINENCE. The unicorn, through its intemperance and not knowing how to control itself, for the love it bears to fair maidens forgets its ferocity and wildness; and laying aside all fear it will go up to a seated damsel and go to sleep in her lap, and thus...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1168. To lie is so vile, that even if it were in speaking well of godly things it would take off something from God's grace; and Truth is so excellent, that if it praises but small things they become noble. Beyond a doubt truth bears the same relation to falsehood...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1456 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1456. p. 438 Bernardo da Ponte... Val di Lugano ... many veins for anatomical demonstration. 785 FOOTNOTES 438:785 : This fragmentary note is written on the margin of a drawing of two legs.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 956 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 956. Whether the flow and ebb are caused by the moon or the sun, or are the breathing of this terrestrial machine. That the flow and ebb are different in different countries and seas. 503 FOOTNOTES 192:503 : 1. Allusion may here be made to the mythological explanati...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 610 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 610. Of depicting natural phenomena (610. 611).The tremendous fury of the wind driven by the falling in of the hills on the caves p. 313 within--by the falling of the hills which served as roofs to these caverns. A stone flung through the air leaves on the eye which...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 393. p. 205 TREES. Classification of trees.Small, lofty, straggling, thick, that is as to foliage, dark, light, russet, branched at the top; some directed towards the eye, some downwards; with white stems; this transparent in the air, that not; some standing close...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 214 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 214. No small hole can so modify the convergence of rays of light as to prevent, at a long distance, the transmission of the true form of the luminous body causing them. It is impossible that rays of light passing through a parallel [slit], should not display the form...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 877 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 877. This will have before it the treatise on light and shade. The edges in the moon will be most strongly lighted and reflect most light, because, there, nothing will be visible but the tops of the waves of the water 456 . FOOTNOTES 147:456 5: I have thought it...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 68 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1215. air would be dismembered or rent and broken up with the rending of the air into which it was incorporated. AS TO WHETHER THE SPIRIT, HAVING TAKEN THIS BODY OF AIR, CAN MOVE OF ITSELF OR NOT. It is impossible that the spirit infused into a certain quantity of air...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1070 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1070. Perpignan. Roanne. Lyons. Paris. Ghent. Bruges. Holland. 587 FOOTNOTES 249:587 : "Roana" does not seem to mean here Rouen in Normandy, but is probably Roanne (Rodumna) on the upper Loire, Lyonnais (Dep. du Loire). This town is now unimportant, but in Leonardo's...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1288 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1288. A man was arguing and boasting that he knew many and various tricks. Another among the bystanders said: "I know how to play a trick which will make whomsoever I like pull off his breeches." The first man-- the boaster--said: "You won't make me pull off mine, and I...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 277 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 277. On the nature of colours (277. 278).No white or black is transparent.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1515 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1515. The cornice above lire 30 The cornice below lire 7 The compositions, one with another lire 13
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1097 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1097. Why does the inundation of the Nile occur in the summer, coming from torrid countries?
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 837 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 837. On the origin of the soul.Though human ingenuity may make various inventions which, by the help of various machines answering the same end, it will never devise any inventions more beautiful, nor more simple, nor more to the purpose than Nature does; because in her...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 63 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 384. No animal can simply move [by its dead weight] a greater weight than the sum of its own weight outside the centre of his fulcrum.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 157 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 157. A single and distinct luminous body causes stronger relief in the object than a diffused light; as may be seen by comparing one side of a landscape illuminated by the sun, and one overshadowed by clouds, and so illuminated only by the diffused light...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 765 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 765. STEPS OF URRBINO. The plinth must be as broad as the thickness of the wall against which the plinth is built. 394 FOOTNOTES 72:394 : See Pl. CX No. 3. The hasty sketch on the right hand side illustrates the unsatisfactory effect produced when the plinth is narrower...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 890 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 890. Because the eye is small it can only see the image of the sun as of a small size. If the eye were as large as the sun it would see the image of the sun in water of the same size as the real body of the sun, so long as the water is smooth.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1296 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1296. (Of going in Ships.) We shall see the trees of the great forests of Taurus and of Sinai and of the Appenines and others, rush by means of the air, from East to West and from North to South; and carry, by means of the air, great multitudes of men. Oh! how many vows...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 74 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 74. Refraction of the rays falling upon the eye (74. 75)The lines sent forth by the image of an object to the eye do not reach the point within the eye in straight lines.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 869 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 869. PERSPECTIVE. It is possible to find means by which the eye shall not see remote objects as much p. 141 diminished as in natural perspective, which diminishes them by reason of the convexity of the eye which necessarily intersects, at its surface, the pyramid...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 653 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 653. THAT PAINTING SURPASSES ALL HUMAN WORKS BY THE SUBTLE CONSIDERATIONS BELONGING TO IT. Painting is superior to poetry (653. 654).The eye, which is called the window of the soul, is the principal means by which the central sense can most completely and abundantly...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1415 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1415. p. 428 Ambrosio Petri, St. Mark, 4 boards for the window, 2..., 3 the saints of chapels, 5 the Genoese at home.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 76 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1217. EXAMPLE OF THE LIGHTNING IN CLOUDS. Reflections on Nature (1217-1219).[O mighty and once living instrument of formative nature. Incapable of availing thyself of thy vast strength thou hast to abandon a life of stillness and to obey the law which God and time gave...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 149 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 149. The light which falls on a shaded body at the acutest angle receives the highest light, and the darkest portion is that which receives it at an obtuse angle and both the light and the shadow form pyramids. The angle "c" receives the highest grade of light because...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 93 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 93. PERSPECTIVE. The relative size of objects with regard to their distance from the eye (93-98).Small objects close at hand and large ones at a distance, being seen within equal angles, will appear of the same size.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 269 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 269. OF PAINTING. The surface of every opaque body assumes the hues reflected from surrounding objects. The surface of an opaque body assumes the hues of surrounding objects more strongly in proportion as the rays that form the images of those objects strike the surface...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1271 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1271. Fables on lifeless objects (1271--1274).The water finding that its element was the lordly ocean, was seized with a desire to rise above the air, and being encouraged by the element of fire and rising as a very subtle vapour, it seemed as though it were really...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 829 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 829. OF THE EYES IN ANIMALS. The eyes of all animals have their pupils adapted to dilate and diminish of their own accord in proportion to the greater or less light of the sun or other luminary. But in birds the variation is much greater; and particularly in nocturnal...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1340. Drafts of Letters to Lodovico il Moro (1340-1345).Most illustrious Lord, Having now sufficiently considered the specimens of all those who proclaim themselves skilled contrivers p. 396 of instruments of war, and that the invention and operation of the said...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1089 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1089. The Tyrrhene Sea.Some at the Tyrrhene sea employ this method; that is to say they fastened an anchor to one end of the yard, and to the other a cord, of which the lower end was fastened to an anchor; and in battle they flung this anchor on to the oars...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 681. Mottos and Emblems (681--702). Stubborn rigour. Doomed rigour. 319 . FOOTNOTES 356:319 : See Pl. LXII, No. 2, the two upper pen and ink drawings. The originals, in the Windsor collection are slightly washed with colour. The background is blue sky; the plough...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 657 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 657. p. 331 OF PAINTING. Aphorisms (657-659).Men and words are ready made, and you, O Painter, if you do not know how to make your figures move, are like an orator who knows not how to use his words.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 72 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1211. On spirits (1211--1213).O mathematicians shed light on this error. The spirit has no voice, because where there is a voice there is a body, and where there is a body space is occupied, and this prevents the eye from seeing what is placed behind that space; hence...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 70 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 70. The function of the eye as explained by the camera obscura (70. 71).If the object in front of the eye sends its image to the eye, the eye, on the other hand, sends its image to the object, and no portion whatever of the object is lost in the images it throws off...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1292 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1292. A man, seeing a woman ready to hold up the target for a jousting match, exclaimed, looking at the shield, and considering his spear: "Alack! this is too small a workman for so great a business."
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1275 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1275. Fables on plants (1275-1279).The cedar, being desirous of producing a fine and noble fruit at its summit, set to work to form it with all the strength of its sap. But this fruit, when grown, was the cause of the tall and upright tree-top being bent over. The peach...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 79 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 366. OF PAINTING. Every part of the whole must be in proportion to the whole. Thus, if a man is of a stout short figure he will be the same in all his parts: that is with short and thick arms, wide thick hands, with short fingers with their joints of the same character...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 34 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 703. p. 361 A bird, for a comedy. 331 FOOTNOTES 361:331 : The biographies say so much, and the author's notes say so little of the invention attributed to Leonardo of making artificial birds fly through the air, that the text here given is of exceptional interest...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 25 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1336. p. 385 1336TO THE DEVATDAR 1 OF SYRIA, LIEUTENANT OF THE SACRED SULTAN 2 OF BABYLON. Drafts of Letters and Reports referring to Armenia (1336. 1337).[ 3] The recent disaster in our Northern parts which I am certain will terrify not you alone but the whole world...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 97 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 97. PERSPECTIVE. Among objects of equal size, that which is most remote from the eye will look the smallest.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 514 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 514. OF THE QUALITY OF THE LIGHT. A broad light high up and not too strong will render the details of objects very agreeable.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Xiii : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 75 XIII. THEORETICAL WRITINGS ON ARCHITECTURE. Leonardo's original writings on the theory of Architecture have come down to us only in a fragmentary state; still, there seems to be no doubt that he himself did not complete them. It would seem that Leonardo...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1074 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1074. p. 251 The river Loire at Amboise. The river is higher within the bank "b d" than outside that bank. The island where there is a part of Amboise. This is the river that passes through Amboise; it passes at a b c d, and when it has passed the bridge it turns back...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 80 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 365. OF PAINTING. Which are the muscles which subdivide in old age or in youth, when becoming lean? Which are the parts of the limbs of the human frame where no amount of fat makes the flesh thicker, nor any degree of leanness ever diminishes it? The thing sought...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 649 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 649. p. 325 FIRE. If you want to make a fire which will set a hall in a blaze without injury do this: first perfume the hall with a dense smoke of incense or some other odoriferous substance: It is a good trick to play. Or boil ten pounds of brandy to evaporate, but see...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 34 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 447. OF THE SHADOWS IN TREES. The sun being in the East [to the right], the trees to the West [or left] of the eye will show in small relief and almost imperceptible p. 225 gradations, because the atmosphere which lies between the eye and those trees is very dense 220...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. V. Palace : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 66 V. PALACE ARCHITECTURE. But a small number of Leonardo's drawings refer to the architecture of palaces, and our knowledge is small as to what style Leonardo might have adopted for such buildings. Pl. CII No. 1 (W. XVIII). A small portion of a facade of a palace...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 873 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 873. THE REASON OF THE INCREASED SIZE OF THE SUN IN THE WEST. Some mathematicians explain that the sun looks larger as it sets, because the eye always sees it through a denser atmosphere, alleging that objects seen through mist or through water appear larger. To these I...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 210 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 210. No man can see the image of another man in a mirror in its proper place with regard to the objects; because every object falls on [the surface of] the mirror at equal angles. And if the one man, who sees the other in the mirror, is not in a direct line with...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 894 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 894. How shadows are lost at great distances, as is shown by the shadow side of the moon which is never seen. 467 FOOTNOTES 156:467 : Compare also Vol. I, Nos. 175-179.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 89 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 89. p. 56 Perspective, in dealing with distances, makes use of two opposite pyramids, one of which has its apex in the eye and the base as distant as the horizon. The other has the base towards the eye and the apex on the horizon. Now, the first includes the [visible]...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 153 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 153. On the proportion of light and shade (153-157).That portion of an opaque body will be more in shade or more in light, which is nearer to the dark body, by which it is shaded, or to the light that illuminates it. Objects seen in light and shade show in greater...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 761 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 761. p. 69 FOR MAKING A CLEAN STABLE. On the dispositions of a stable.The manner in which one must arrange a stable. You must first divide its width in 3 parts, its depth matters not; and let these 3 divisions be equal and 6 braccia broad for each part and 10 high...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1093 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1093. p. 264 The Nile (1093-1098).Therefore we must conclude those mountains to be of the greatest height, above which the clouds falling in snow give rise to the Nile.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 67 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 380. OF THE HUMAN BODY IN ACTION. On the human body in action (380-388).When you want to represent a man as moving some weight consider what the movements are that are to be represented by different lines; that is to say either from below upwards, with a simple movement...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 833 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 833. If you draw in breath by the nose and send it out by the mouth you will hear the sound made by the division that is the membrane in 430 ... FOOTNOTES 124:430 5: The text here breaks off.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 273 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 273. The effect of colours in the camera obscura (273-274).The edges of a colour(ed object) transmitted through a small hole are more conspicuous than the central portions. The edges of the images, of whatever colour, which are transmitted through a small aperture...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 100 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 100. p. 60 OF THE DIMINUTION OF OBJECTS AT VARIOUS DISTANCES. A second object as far distant from the first as the first is from the eye will appear half the size of the first, though they be of the same size really. OF THE DEGREES OF DIMINUTION. If you place...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1236 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1236. THE PELICAN. This bird has a great love for its young; and when it finds them in its nest dead from a serpent's bite, it pierces itself to the heart, and with its blood it bathes them till they return to life. THE SALAMANDER. This has no digestive organs, and gets...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 557 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 557. OF LIGHTS AND SHADOWS. I must remind you to take care that every portion of a body, and every smallest detail which is ever so little in relief, must be given its proper importance as to light and shade.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 717 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 717. Messer Galeazzo's Sicilian horse. 340 FOOTNOTES 14:340 : These notes are by the side of a drawing of a horse with figured measurements.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1328 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1328. A COMMON THING. A wretched person will be flattered, and these flatterers are always the deceivers, robbers and murderers of the wretched person. The image of the sun where it falls appears as a thing which covers the person who attempts to cover it. (Money...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 614 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 614. PAPER FOR DRAWING UPON IN BLACK BY THE AID OF YOUR SPITTLE. Take powdered gall nuts and vitriol, powder them and spread them on paper like a varnish, then write on it with a pen wetted with spittle and it will turn as black as ink.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 952 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 952. OF WAVES. On the encroachments of the sea on the land and vice versa (952-954).A wave of the sea always breaks in front of its base, and that portion of the crest will then be lowest which before was highest. 502 FOOTNOTES 191:502 : The page of FRANCESCO DI...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1452 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1452. Vespuccio will give me a book of Geometry. 775 FOOTNOTES 436:775 : See No. 844, note, p. 130.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 69 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 470. OF REPRESENTING WIND. The effect of wind on trees (470-473).In representing wind, besides the bending of the boughs and the reversing of their leaves towards the quarter whence the wind comes, you should also represent them amid clouds of fine dust mingled with...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1029 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1029. p. 237 Notes on the North Italian lake. (1029-1033)In many places there are streams of water which swell for six hours and ebb for six hours; and I, for my part, have seen one above the lake of Como called Fonte Pliniana, which increases and ebbs, as I have said...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 549 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 549. HOW THE PAINTER MUST PLACE HIMSELF WITH REFERENCE TO THE LIGHT, TO GIVE THE EFFECT OF RELIEF. On the choice of light for a picture (549-554).Let "a b" be the window, "m" the point of light. I say that on whichever side the painter places himself he will be well...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 90 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " VIII. BOTANY FOR PAINTERS AND ELEMENTS OF LANDSCAPE PAINTING Introduction 393. 394. 395. 396. 397. 398. 399. 400. 401. 402. 403. 404. 405. 406. 407. 408. 409. 410. 411. 412. 413. 414. 415. 416. 417. 418. 419. 420. 421. 422. 423. 424. 425. 426. 427. 428. 429. 430. 431. 432...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 110 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 110. p. 69 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. Prolegomena.You must first explain the theory and then the practice. First you must describe the shadows and lights on opaque objects, and then on transparent bodies.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 311. p. 171 The distance from the attachment of one ear to the other is equal to that from the meeting of the eyebrows to the chin, and in a fine face the width of the mouth is equal to the length from the parting of the lips to the bottom of the chin.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1228 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1228. FIDELITY, OR LOYALTY. The cranes are so faithful and loyal to their king, that at night, when he is sleeping, some of them go round the field to keep watch at a distance; others remain near, each holding a stone in his foot, so that if sleep should overcome them...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 224 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 224. Every visible body, in so far as it affects the eye, includes three attributes; that is to say: mass, form and colour; and the mass is recognisable at a greater distance from the place of its actual existence than either colour or form. Again, colour is discernible...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1552 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1552. Stephano Chigi, Canonico....., servant of the honorable Count Grimani at S. Apostoli. 857 FOOTNOTES 465:857 : Compare No. 674, 21--23.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1037 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1037. The rock of Cesena. 562 FOOTNOTES 240:562 : See Pl. XCIV No. 1, the lower sketch. The explanation of the upper sketch is given on p. 29.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 709 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 709. Sculptured figures which appear in motion, will, in their standing position, actually look as if they were falling forward. 334 FOOTNOTES 10:334 : "figure di rilievo". Leonardo applies this term exclusively to wholly detached figures, especially to those standing...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 77 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 462. OF PAINTING IN A LANDSCAPE. If the slope of a hill comes between the eye and the horizon, sloping towards the eye, while the eye is opposite the middle of the height of this slope, then that hill will p. 233 increase in darkness throughout its length. This is...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 12. Many will think they may reasonably blame me by alleging that my proofs are opposed to the authority of certain men held in the highest reverence by their inexperienced judgments; not considering that my works are the issue of pure and simple experience, who is...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 64 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 475. The shadows in clouds are lighter in proportion as they are nearer to the horizon. 229 FOOTNOTES 237:229 : The drawing belonging to this was in black chalk and is totally effaced.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 619 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 619. Use black in the shadow, and in the lights white, yellow, green, vermilion and lake. Medium shadows; take the shadow as above and mix it with the flesh tints just alluded to, adding to it a little yellow and a little green and occasionally some lake;...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1325 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1325. Flax is dedicated to death, and to the corruption of mortals. To death, by being used for snares and nets for birds, animals and fish; to corruption, by the flaxen sheets in which the dead are wrapped when they are buried, and who become corrupt in these winding...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1024 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1024. p. 236 Notes on the Sforzesca near Vigevano (1024-1028).On the 2nd day of February 1494. At Sforzesca I drew twenty five steps, 2/3 braccia to each, and 8 braccia wide. 550 FOOTNOTES 236:550 : See Pl. CX, No. 2. The rest of the notes on this page refer...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 785. p. 90 ON THE STRENGTH OF THE ARCH IN ARCHITECTURE. The stability of the arch built by an architect resides in the tie and in the flanks. ON THE POSITION OF THE TIE IN THE ABOVE NAMED ARCH. The position of the tie is of the same importance at the beginning...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 37 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 356. Three are the principal muscles of the shoulder, that is "b c d", and two are the lateral muscles which move it forward and backward, that is "a o"; "a" moves it forward, and "o" pulls it back; and bed raises it; "a b c" moves it upwards and forwards, and "c d o"...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1541 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1541. Two large hatchets and one very small one, 8 brass spoons, 4 tablecloths, 2 towels, 15 small napkins, 2 coarse napkins, 2 coarse cloths, 2 wrappers, 3 pairs of sheets, 2 pairs new and 1 old.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 237 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 237. OF PAINTING. You will observe in drawing that among the shadows some are of undistinguishable gradation and form, as is shown in the 3rd [proposition] which says: Rounded surfaces display as many degrees of light and shade as there are varieties of brightness...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 83 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 455. Of trees seen from below and against the light, one beyond the other and near together. The topmost part of the first will be in great part transparent and light, and will stand out against the dark portion of the second tree. And thus it will be with all...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. I. Plans : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 27 "XII." "ARCHITECTURAL DESIGNS." "I. PLANS FOR TOWNS." A. Sketches for laying out a new town with a double system of high- level and low-level road-ways. "Pl. LXXVII, No. "1" (MS. B, "15b). A general view of a town, with the roads outside it sloping up...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 22 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1155. OF MECHANICS. Mechanics are the Paradise of mathematical science, because here we come to the fruits of mathematics. 635 FOOTNOTES 289:635 : Compare No. 660, 11. 19--22 (Vol. I., p. 332).
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1441 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1441. See the shop that was formerly Bartolommeo's, the stationer. 756 FOOTNOTES 433:756 : 6. "Marc Antonio", see No. 1433.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 941 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 941. OF THE HEAT THAT IS IN THE WORLD. Theory of the elevation of water within the mountains.Where there is life there is heat, and where vital heat is, there is movement of vapour. This is proved, inasmuch as we see that the element of fire by its heat always draws...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 607 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 607. TO REPRESENT THE DELUGE. Of representing the deluge (607-609).The air was darkened by the heavy rain whose oblique descent driven aslant by the rush of the winds, flew in drifts through the air not otherwise than as we see dust, varied only by the straight lines...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 544 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 544. A diminished object should be seen from the same distance, height and direction as the point of sight of your eye, or else your knowledge will produce no good effect. And if you will not, or cannot, act on this principle--because as the plane on which you paint is...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 229 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 229. That part of a surface will be better lighted on which the light falls at the greater angle. And that part, on which the shadow falls at the greatest angle, will receive from those rays least of the benefit of the light.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 378. The sinew which guides the leg, and which is connected with the patella of the knee, feels it a greater labour to carry the man upwards, in proportion as the leg is more bent; and the muscle which acts p. 197 upon the angle made by the thigh where it joins the body...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1225 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1225. GENEROSITY. It is said of the eagle that it is never so hungry but that it will leave a part of its prey for the birds that are round it, which, being unable to provide their own food, are necessarily dependent on the eagle, since it is thus that they obtain food...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 697. p. 360 A felled tree which is shooting again. 30 40 1200 I am still hopeful. A falcon, Time. 326 FOOTNOTES 360:326 : I. "Albero tagliato". This emblem was displayed during the Carnival at Florence in 1513. See VASARI VI, 251, ed. MILANESI 1881. But the coincidence...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1502 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1502. Vitruvius says that small models are of no avail for ascertaining the effects of large ones; and I here propose to prove that this conclusion is a false one. And chiefly by bringing forward the very same argument which led him to this conclusion; that is, by...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1376. On the 9th of January 1513. 703 FOOTNOTES 416:703 : No. 1465 belongs to the same year. No. 1065 has the next date 1514.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1080 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1080. p. 256 On the Germans (1080. 1081).The way in which the Germans closing up together cross and interweave their broad leather shields against the enemy, stooping down and putting one of the ends on the ground while they hold the rest in their hand. 596 FOOTNOTES...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 820 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 820. Of the flight of the 4th kind of butterflies that consume winged ants. Of the three principal positions of the wings of birds in downward flight. 425 FOOTNOTES 119:425 : A passing allusion is all I can here permit myself to Leonardo's elaborate researches ...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1278 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1278. p. 343 A FABLE. The privet feeling its tender boughs loaded with young fruit, pricked by the sharp claws and beak of the insolent blackbird, complained to the blackbird with pitious remonstrance entreating her that since she stole its delicious fruits she should...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 74 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 371. A man when walking has his head in advance of his feet. A man when walking across a long level plain first leans [rather] backwards and then as much forwards. 181 FOOTNOTES 194:181 3-6: He strides forward with the air of a man going down hill; when weary...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 140 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 140. Every body in light and shade is situated between 2 pyramids one dark and the other luminous, one is visible the other is not. But this only happens when the light enters by a window. Supposing "a b" to be the window and "r" the body in light and shade, the light...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 519 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 519. That the light should fall upon a picture from one window only. This may be seen in the case of objects in this form. If you want to represent a round ball at a certain height you must make it oval in this shape, and stand so far off as that by foreshortening it...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 887 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 887. PROOF THAT THE NEARER YOU ARE TO THE SOURCE OF THE SOLAR RAYS, THE LARGER WILL THE REFLECTION OF THE SUN FROM THE SEA APPEAR TO YOU. 463 If it is from the centre that the sun employs its radiance to intensify the power of its whole mass, it is evident th...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 396. p. 206 If the plant n grows to the thickness shown at m, its branches will correspond [in thickness] to the junction a b in consequence of the growth inside as well as outside. The law of proportion in the growth of the branches (396--402).The branches of trees...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 203 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 203. p. 113 FIFTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. OF THE WAY IN WHICH THE SHADOWS CAST BY OBJECTS OUGHT TO BE DEFINED. Principles of reflection (203. 204).If the object is the mountain here figured, and the light is at the point "a", I say that from "b d" and also from "c f"...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 860 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 860. Why does not the weight "o" remain in its place? It does not remain because it has no resistance. Where will it move to? It will move towards the centre [of gravity]. And why by no other line? Because a weight which has no support falls by the shortest road...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1067 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1067. The shepherds in the Romagna at the foot of the Apennines make peculiar large cavities in the mountains in the form of a horn, and on one side they fasten a horn. This little horn becomes one and the same with the said cavity and thus they produce by blowing...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 287 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 287. On the colours of the rainbow (287. 288).Treat of the rainbow in the last book on Painting, but first write the book on colours produced by the mixture of other colours, so as to be able to prove by those painters' colours how the colours of the rainbow are...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 203 "VIII." "BOTANY FOR PAINTERS AND ELEMENTS OF LANDSCAPE PAINTING." The chapters composing this portion of the work consist of observations on Form, Light and Shade in Plants, and particularly in Trees summed up in certain general rules by which the author intends...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 899 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 899. OF THE MOON. I say that as the moon has no light in itself and yet is luminous, it is inevitable but that its light is caused by some other body.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 84 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 84. Pictorial perspective can never make an object at the same distance, look of the same size as it appears to the eye. You see that the apex of the pyramid "f c d" is as far from the object "c d" as the same point "f" is p. 54 from the object "a b"; and yet "c d"...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 507 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 507. OF GAMES TO BE PLAYED BY THOSE WHO DRAW. Useful games and exercises (507. 508).When, Oh draughtsmen, you desire to find relaxation in games you should always practise such things as may be of use in your profession, by giving your eye good practice in judging...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1266 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1266. A FABLE. The thrushes rejoiced greatly at seeing a man take the owl and deprive her of liberty, tying her feet with strong bonds. But this owl was afterwards by means of bird-lime the cause of the thrushes losing not only their liberty, but their life. This is...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 36 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1367. Do not reveal, if liberty is precious to you; my face is the prison of love. 694 FOOTNOTES 414:694 : This note seems to be a quotation.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 684. Truth the sun. falsehood a mask. innocence, malignity. Fire destroys falsehood, that is sophistry, and restores truth, driving out darkness. Fire may be represented as the destroy of all sophistry, and as the image and demonstration of truth; because it is light...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1281 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1281. When wine is drunk by a drunkard, that wine is revenged on the drinker.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1079 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1079. THE ROAD TO ORLEANS At 1/4 from the South to the South East. At 1/3 from the South to the South East. At 1/4 from the South to the South East. At 1/5 from the South to the South East. Between the South West and South, to the East bearing to the South;...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 63 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 63. p. 39 Every body in light and shade fills the surrounding air with infinite images of itself; and these, by infinite pyramids diffused in the air, represent this body throughout space and on every side. Each pyramid that is composed of a long assemblage of rays...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 271 "XVIII." "NAVAL WARFARE.--MECHANICAL APPLIANCES.--MUSIC." Such theoretical questions, as have been laid before the reader in Sections XVI and XVII, though they were the chief subjects of Leonardo's studies of the sea, did not exclusively claim his attenti...
Vol. I. Plates Ii Xxxv. Plates Ii Xxxv : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " PLATES II-XXXV Plate II Plate III Plate IV Plate V Plate VI Plate VII Plate VIII Plate IX Plate X Plate XI Plate XII Plate XIII Plate XIV Plate XV Plate XVI Plate XVII Plate XVIII Plate XIX Plate XX Plate XXI Plate XXII Plate XXIII Plate XXIV Plate XXV Plate XXVI Plate...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 442. OF THE HERBS OF THE FIELD. Of the plants which take a shadow from the plants which spring among them, those p. 223 which are on this side [in front] of the shadow have the stems lighted up on a background of shadow, and the plants on which the shadows fall have...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 644 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 644. Four ounces virgin wax, four ounces Greek pitch, two ounces incense, one ounce oil of roses, first melt the wax and oil then the Greek pitch then the other things in powder.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 796 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 796. p. 107 I. ANATOMY. A GENERAL INTRODUCTION I wish to work miracles;--it may be that I shall possess less than other men of more peaceful lives, or than those who want to grow rich in a day. I may live for a long time in great poverty, as always happens, and to all...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1262 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1262. p. 334 THE CHAMELEON. This creature always takes the colour of the thing on which it is resting, whence it is often devoured together with the leaves on which the elephant feeds. THE RAVEN. When it has killed the Chameleon it takes laurel as a purge.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 688. On this side Adam and Eve on the other; O misery of mankind, of how many things do you make yourself the slave for money! 323 FOOTNOTES 358:323 : See Pl. LXIV. The figures of Adam and Eve in the clouds here alluded to would seem to symbolise their superiority...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1518 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1518. p. 456 The wheel lire 7 the tire lire 10 the shield lire 4 the cushion lire 8 the ends of the axle-tree lire 2 bed and frame lire 30 conduit lire 10
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1371. On the 1st of August 1499, I wrote here of motion and of weight. 698 FOOTNOTES 415:698 :1371. "Scrissi qui". Leonardo does not say where; still we may assume that it was not in Milan. Amoretti writes, Memorie Storiche, chap. XIX: Sembra pertanto che non nel 1499...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 80 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 80. AS TO WHETHER THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE IMAGE CAN BE INTERSECTED, OR NOT, WITHIN THE OPENING. It is impossible that the line should intersect itself; that is, that its right should cross over to its left side, and so, its left side become its right side. Because such...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 503 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 503. OF VARIETY IN THE FIGURES. How to acquire universality (503-506).The painter should aim at universality, because there is a great want of self-respect in doing one thing well and another badly, as many do who study only the [rules of] measure and proporti...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 768 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 768. "a b" is 1/3 of "n m"; "m o" is 1/6 of "r o". The ovolo projects 1/6 of "r o"; "s" 7 1/5 of "r o", "a b" is divided into 9 1/2; the abacus is 3/9 the ovolo 4/9, the bead-moulding and the fillet 2/9 and 1/2. 397 p. 74 Pl. LXXXV No. 6 (MS. Ash. II 6b) contains...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1406 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1406. p. 426 The road of Messer Mariolo is 13 1/4 braccia wide; the House of Evangelista is 75. It enters 7 1/2 braccia in the house of Mariolo. 723 FOOTNOTES 426:723 : On this page and that which faces it, MS.I2 7la, are two diagrams with numerous reference numbers...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 640 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 640. Sea water filtered through mud or clay, leaves all its saltness in it. Woollen stuffs placed on board ship absorb fresh water. If sea water is distilled under a retort it becomes of the first excellence and any one who has a little stove in his kitchen can, with...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 65 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1204. To preserve Nature's chiefest boon, that is freedom, I can find means of offence and defence, when it is assailed by ambitious tyrants, and first I will speak of the situation of the walls, and also I shall show how communities can maintain their good and just...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 219 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 219. A luminous body will appear less brilliant when surrounded by a bright background. I have found that the stars which are nearest to the horizon look larger than the others because light falls upon them from a larger proportion of the solar body than when they are...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 67 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 67. General conclusions.All objects project their whole image and likeness, diffused and mingled in the whole of the atmosphere, opposite to themselves. The image of every point of the bodily surface, exists in every part of the atmosphere. All the images of the objects...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1285 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1285. p. 350 A JEST. A man wishing to prove, by the authority of Pythagoras, that he had formerly been in the world, while another would not let him finish his argument, the first speaker said to the second: "It is by this token that I was formerly here, I remember th...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 883 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 883. p. 151 To measure how many times the diameter of the sun will go into its course in 24 hours. Make a circle and place it to face the south, after the manner of a sundial, and place a rod in the middle in such a way as that its length points to the centre of this...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 144 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 144. The eye which looks (at a spot) half way between the shadow and the light which p. 85 surrounds the body in shadow will see that the deepest shadows on that body will meet the eye at equal angles, that is at the same angle as that of sight. 65 FOOTNOTES 85:65 :...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1084 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1084. p. 259 WHY THE CURRENT OF GIBRALTAR IS ALWAYS GREATER TO THE WEST THAN TO THE EAST. The reason is that if you put together the mouths of the rivers which discharge into the Mediterranean sea, you would find the sum of water to be larger than that which this se...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1506 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1506. In Vitolone there are 805 conclusions [problems] in perspective. 839 FOOTNOTES 453:839 : (Witelo, Vitellion, Vitellon) Vitellione. da vedersi su questo ottico prospettico del secolo XIII Luca Pacioli, Paolo Lomazzo, Leonardo da Vinci, ecc. e fra i moderni il...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 70 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 376. I ask the weight [pressure] of this man at every degree of motion on these steps, what weight he gives to "b" and to "c". 184 Observe the perpendicular line below the centre of gravity of the man. 185 FOOTNOTES 196:184 8: These lines are, in the original, written...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 824 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 824. p. 120 Here I make a note to demonstrate the difference there is between man and the horse and in the same way with other animals. And first I will begin with the bones, and then will go on to all the muscles which spring from the bones without tendons and end...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 264 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 264. OF SHADOW. The surface of any opaque body is affected by the colour of surrounding objects.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 283 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 283. WHAT PORTION OF A COLOURED SURFACE OUGHT IN REASON TO BE THE MOST INTENSE. If "a" is the light, and "b" illuminated by it in a direct line, "c", on which the light cannot fall, is lighted only by reflection from "b" which, let us say, is red. Hence the light...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1063 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1063. p. 247 The Appenins (1063-1068).That part of the earth which was lightest remained farthest from the centre of the world; and that part of the earth became the lightest over which the greatest quantity of water flowed. And therefore that part became lightest where...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 400. p. 207 OF THE RAMIFICATION. The beginning of the ramification [the shoot] always has the central line [axis] of its thickness directed to the central line [axis] of the plant itself.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 79 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 79. OF THE CENTRAL LINE OF THE EYE. Only one line of the image, of all those that reach the visual virtue, has no intersection; and this has no sensible dimensions because it is a mathematical line which originates from a mathematical point, which has no dimensions...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 864 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 864. Mem.: That I must first show the distance of the sun from the earth; and, by means of a ray passing through a small hole into a dark chamber, detect its real size; and besides this, by means of the aqueous sphere calculate the size of the globe... Here it will be...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 207 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 207. It is impossible that an object mirrored on water should correspond in form to the object mirrored, since the centre of the eye is above the surface of the water. p. 115 This is made plain in the figure here given, which demonstrates that the eye sees the surface...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1165. How to spend life (1165-1170).0 sleepers! what a thing is slumber! Sleep resembles death. Ah, why then dost thou not work in such wise as that after death thou mayst retain a resemblance to perfect life, when, during life, thou art in sleep so like to the hapless...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 603 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 603. p. 304 OF LIGHTING THE LOWER PARTS OF BODIES CLOSE TOGETHER, AS OF MEN IN BATTLE. As to men and horses represented in battle, their different parts will be dark in proportion as they are nearer to the ground on which they stand. And this is proved by the sides...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 945 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 945. have flowed from the summits of the mountains of Armenia, it must be believed that all the water of the ocean has passed very many times through these mouths. And do you not believe that the Nile must have sent more water into the sea than at present exists of all...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1445 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1445. p. 434 In that at Pavia the movement is more to be admired than any thing else. The imitation of antique work is better than that of the modern things. Beauty and utility cannot exist together, as seen in fortresses and in men. The trot is almost the nature...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 16. THE DISCOURSE ON PAINTING. Perspective, as bearing on drawing, is divided into three principal sections; of which the first treats of the diminution in the size of bodies at different distances. The second part is that which treats of the diminution in colour...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 789. p. 95 IV. ON FOUNDATIONS, THE NATURE OF THE GROUND AND SUPPORTS. The first and most important thing is stability. As to the foundations of the component parts of temples and other public buildings, the depths of the foundations must bear the same proportions...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1221 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1221. ENVY. We read of the kite that, when it sees its young ones growing too big in the nest, out of envy it pecks their sides, and keeps them without food. p. 316 CHEERFULNESS. Cheerfulness is proper to the cock, which rejoices over every little thing, and crows with...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 540 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 540. OF PAINTING. The right position of the artist, when painting, and of the spectator (540-547)When you draw from nature stand at a distance of 3 times the height of the object you wish to draw.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 119 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 119. WHAT LIGHT AND SHADOW ARE. Definition of the nature of shadows (119--122).Shadow is the absence of light, merely the obstruction of the luminous rays by an opaque body. Shadow is of the nature of darkness. Light [on an object] is of the nature of a luminous body;...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 781. ON THE REMEDY FOR EARTHQUAKES. The arch which throws its pressure perpendicularly on the abutments will fulfil its function whatever be its direction, upside down, sideways or upright. The arch will not break if the chord of the outer arch does not touch the inner...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1020 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1020. OF THE FORCE OF THE VACUUM FORMED IN A MOMENT. I saw, at Milan, a thunderbolt fall on the tower della Credenza on its Northern side, and it descended with a slow motion down that side, and then at once parted from that tower and carried with it and tore away...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1321 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1321. p. 375 A SIMILE. A vase of unbaked clay, when broken, may be remoulded, but not a baked one.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 38 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1179. Some there are who are nothing else than a passage for food and augmentors of excrement and fillers of privies, because through them no other things in the world, nor any good effects are produced, since nothing but full privies results from them.
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 8. The order of your book must proceed on this plan: first simple beams, then (those) supported from below, then suspended in part, then wholly [suspended]. Then beams as supporting other weights 5 . FOOTNOTES 13:5 : 4. Leonardo's notes on Mechanics are extraordinarily...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 60 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 479. Of rainbows and rain (479. 480).The colours in the middle of the rainbow mingle together. The bow in itself is not in the rain nor in the eye that sees it; though it is generated by the rain, the sun, and the eye. The rainbow is always seen by the eye that is...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 87 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 451. OF TREES. What outlines are seen in trees at a distance against the sky which serves as their background? The outlines of the ramification of trees, where they lie against the illuminated sky, display a form which more nearly approaches the spherical on proporti...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 33 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 360. OF PAINTING. Note in the motions and attitudes of figures how the limbs vary, and their feeling, for the shoulderblades in the motions of the arms and shoulders vary the [line of the] back bone very much. And you will find all the causes of this in my book...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 109 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 109. OF A MIXTURE OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL PERSPECTIVE. This diagram distinguishes natural from artificial perspective. But before proceeding any farther I will define what is natural and what is artificial perspective. Natural perspective says that the more remote...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 233 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 233. OF PAINTING. Our true perception of an object diminishes in proportion as its size is diminished by distance.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1545 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1545. Sunday meat S 10 d wine S 12 d bran S 5 d 4 herbs S 10 d buttermilk S 4 d 4 melon S 3 d bread S 3 d 1 Monday S 9 8 ..... S 6 d wine S 12 d bran S 9 d 4 buttermilk S 4 d 4 herbs S 8 d p. 463 Tuesday S d meat S 0 d 8 wine S 12 d bread S 3 d meal S 5 d 4 herbs S 8 d...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 548 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 548. p. 276 III. THE PRACTICAL METHODS OF LIGHT AND SHADE AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE. OF PAINTING: OF THE DARKNESS OF THE SHADOWS, OR I MAY SAY, THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE LIGHTS. Gradations of light and shade.Although practical painters attribute to all shaded objects--trees...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 111 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 111. INTRODUCTION. Scheme of the books on Light and shade.[Having already treated of the nature of shadows and the way in which they are cast 54 , I will now consider the places on which they fall; and their curvature, obliquity, flatness or, in short, any character I...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1229 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1229. LIES. The mole has very small eyes and it always lives under ground; and it lives as long as it is in the dark but when it comes into the light it dies immediately, because it becomes known;--and so it is with lies. VALOUR. The lion is never afraid, but rather...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 25 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 310. p. 170 Proportions of the head and face (310-318).The space between the parting of the lips [the mouth] and the base of the nose is one-seventh of the face. The space from the mouth to the bottom of the chin "c d" is the fourth part of the face and equal...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1553 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1553. Having become anxious.......... Bernardo di Simone, Silvestro di Stefano, Bernardo di Jacopo, Francesco di Matteo Bonciani, Antonio di Giovanni Ruberti, Antonio da Pistoia.... Antonio; He who has time and waits for time, will lose his friends and his money.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 225 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 225. OF THE ATMOSPHERE THAT INTERPOSES BETWEEN THE EYE AND VISIBLE OBJECTS. A guiding rule.An object will appear more or less distinct at the same distance, in proportion as the atmosphere existing between the eye and that object is more or less clear. Hence, as I know...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1036 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1036. Acquapendente is near Orvieto. 561 FOOTNOTES 240:561 : "Acquapendente" is about 10 miles West of Orvieto, and is to the right in the map on Pl. CXIII, near the lake of Bolsena.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 708 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 708. MEASUREMENT AND DIVISION OF A STATUE. Divide the head into 12 degrees, and each degree divide into 12 points, and each point into 12 minutes, and the minutes into minims and the minims into semi minims. Degree--point--minute--minim.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 25 "INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DESIGNS (XII), AND WRITINGS ON ARCHITECTURE (XIII)." Until now very little has been known regarding Leonardo's labours in the domain of Architecture. No building is known to have been planned and executed by him...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 76 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 463. OF LANDSCAPES. The colours of the shadows in mountains at a great distance take a most lovely blue, much purer than their illuminated portions. And from this it follows that when the rock of a mountain is reddish the illuminated portions are violet (?) and the more...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 101 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 101. Begin from the line "m f" with the eye below; then go up and do the same with the line "n f", then with the eye above and close to the 2 gauges on the ground look at "m n"; then as "c m" is to "m n" so will "n m" be to "n s". If "a n" goes 3 times into "f b, m p"...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1237 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1237. THE ALEPO, A FISH. The fish "alepo" does not live out of water. THE OSTRICH. This bird converts iron into nourishment, and hatches its eggs by its gaze;--Armies under commanders. p. 323 THE SWAN. The swan is white without any spot, and it sings sweetly as it dies...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 556 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 556. OF SHADOWS ON BODIES. The distribution of light and shade (556-559)When you represent the dark shadows in bodies in light and shade, always show the cause of the shadow, and the same with reflections; because the dark shadows are produced by dark objects...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. Ii : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 30 "II. PLANS FOR CANALS AND STREETS IN A TOWN." Pl. LXXIX, 1. and 2, (MS. B, 37b, see No. 745, and MS. B. 36a, see No. 746). A Plan for streets and canals inside a town, by which the cellars of the houses are made accessible in boats. The third text given under No...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1161. OF THE ERRORS OF THOSE WHO DEPEND ON PRACTICE WITHOUT SCIENCE. Those who fall in love with practice without science are like a sailor who enters a ship without a helm or a compass, and who never can be certain whither he is going.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1329 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1329. (Of Bees.) They live together in communities, they are destroyed that we may take the honey from them. Many and very great nations will be destroyed in their own dwellings.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 615 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 615. p. 316 If you want to make foreshortened letters stretch the paper in a drawing frame and then draw your letters and cut them out, and make the sunbeams pass through the holes on to another stretched paper, and then fill up the angles that are wanting.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 953 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 953. p. 192 That the shores of the sea constantly acquire more soil towards the middle of the sea; that the rocks and promontories of the sea are constantly being ruined and worn away; that the Mediterranean seas will in time discover their bottom to the air, and all...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1453 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1453. Marcantonio Colonna at Santi Apostoli. 776 FOOTNOTES 436:776 : In July 1506 Pope Julius II gave Donna Lucrezia della Rovere, the daughter of his sister Lucchina, in marriage to the youthful Marcantonio Colonna, who, like his brothers Prospero and Fabrizio, became...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 68 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 471. Describe landscapes with the wind, and the water, and the setting and rising of the sun. THE WIND. All the leaves which hung towards the earth by the bending of the shoots with their branches, are turned up side down by the gusts of wind, and here their perspective...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1028 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1028. Stair of Vigevano below La Sforzesca, 130 steps, 1/4 braccio high and 1/2 braccio wide, down which the water falls, so as not to wear away anything at the end of its fall; by these steps so much soil has come down that it has dried up a pool; that is to say it h...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1075 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1075. The water may be dammed up above the level of Romorantin to such a height, that in its fall it may be used for numerous mills. p. 252 The river at Villefranche may be conducted to Romorantin which may be done by the inhabitants; and the timber of which their...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 81 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " VII. ON THE PROPORTIONS AND ON THE MOVEMENTS OF THE HUMAN FIGURE Introduction 308. 309. 310. 311. 312. 313. 314. 315. 316. 317. 318. 319. 320. 321. 322. 323. 324. 325. 326. 327. 328. 329. 330. 331. 332. 333. 334. 335. 336. 337. 338. 339. 340. 341. 342. 343. 344. 345. 346...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 648 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 648. A white horse may have the spots removed with the Spanish haematite or with aqua fortis or with... Removes the black hair on a white horse with the singeing iron. Force him to the ground.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 446. OF TREES IN THE EAST. When the sun is in the East the trees seen towards the East will have the light which surrounds them all round their shadows, excepting on the side towards the earth; unless the tree has been pruned [below] in the past year. And the trees...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 872 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 872. "a", the side of the body in light and shade "b", faces the whole portion of the hemisphere bed "e f", and does not face any part of the darkness of the earth. And the same occurs at the point "o"; therefore the space a "o" is throughout of one and the same...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 211 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 211. OF THE SHADOW AND ITS MOTION. Appendix:--On shadows in movement (211. 212).When two bodies casting shadows, and one in front of the other, are between a window and the wall with some space between them, the shadow of the body which is nearest to the plane...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 88 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 88. Objects of equal size, situated in various places, will be seen by different pyramids which will each be smaller in proportion as the object is farther off.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 895 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 895. Either the moon has intrinsic luminosity or not. If it has, why does it not shine without the aid of the sun? But if it has not any light in itself it must of necessity be a spherical mirror; and if it is a mirror, is it not proved in Perspective that the image...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 152 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 152. That portion of the primary shadow will be least dark which is farthest from the edges. The derived shadow will be darker than the primary shadow where it is contiguous with it.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 760 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 760. On the proportions of a courtyard.In the courtyard the walls must be half the height of its width, that is if the court be 40 braccia, the house must be 20 high as regards the walls of the said courtyard; and this courtyard must be half as wide as the whole front...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1510 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1510. On the ioth day of July 1492 in 135 Rhenish florins 1. 445 in dinari of 6 soldi 1. 112 S 16 in dinari of 5 1/2 soldi 1. 29 S 13 9 in gold and 3 scudi l. 53 1. 811 in all
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1092 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1092. The surface of the Red Sea is on a level with the ocean. p. 263 A mountain may have fallen and closed the mouth of the Red Sea and prevented the outlet of the Mediterranean, and the Mediterranean Sea thus overfilled had for outlet the passage below the mountains...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 66 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 381. Again, a man has even a greater store of strength in his legs than he needs for his own weight; and to see if this is true, make a man stand on the shore-sand and then put another man on his back, and you will see how much he will sink in. Then take the m...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 832 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 832. p. 124 Remarks on the organs of speech (832. 833).The tongue is found to have 24 muscles which correspond to the six muscles which compose the portion of the tongue which moves in the mouth. And when "a o u" are spoken with a clear and rapid pronunciation, it is...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 272 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 272. Combination of different colours in cast shadows.That which casts the shadow does not face it, because the shadows are produced by the light which causes and surrounds the shadows. The shadow caused by the light "e", p. 146 which is yellow, has a blue tinge...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1410 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1410. p. 427 Caravaggio. 725 FOOTNOTES 427:725 :Caravaggio, a village not far from the Adda between Milan and Brescia, where Polidoro and Michelangelo da Caravaggio were born. This note is given in facsimile on Pl. XIII, No. I (above, to the left). On Pl. XIII, No. 2...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 656 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 656. We know very well that a really experienced and good painter will not make such mistakes; on the contrary, with sound rules he will remove so little at a time that he will bring his work to a good issue. Again the sculptor if working in clay or wax, can add...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 73 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1210. Against writers of epitomes.Abbreviators do harm to knowledge and to love, seeing that the love of any thing is the offspring of this knowledge, the love being the more fervent in proportion as the knowledge is more certain. And this certainty is born...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 71 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 71. HOW THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS RECEIVED BY THE EYE INTERSECT WITHIN THE CRYSTALLINE HUMOUR OF THE EYE. An experiment, showing how objects transmit their images or pictures, intersecting p. 45 within the eye in the crystalline humour, is seen when by some small round hole...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1293 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1293. p. 353 IV. PROPHECIES. THE DIVISION OF THE PROPHECIES. First, of things relating to animals; secondly, of irrational creatures; thirdly of plants; fourthly, of ceremonies; fifthly, of manners; sixthly, of cases or edicts or quarrels; seventhly, of cases that are...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 78 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 367. OF THE AGREEMENT OF THE PROPORTION OF THE LIMBS. And again, remember to be very careful in giving your figures limbs, that they must appear to agree with the size of the body and likewise to the age. Thus a youth has limbs that are not very muscular not strongly...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1274 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1274. A small patch of snow finding itself clinging to the top of a rock which was lying on the topmost height of a very high mountain and being left to its own imaginings, it began to reflect in this way, saying to itself: "Now, shall not I be thought vain and proud...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 702. One's thoughts turn towards Hope. 330 Ornaments and Decorations for feasts (703-705). FOOTNOTES 360:330 : 702. By the side of this passage is a sketch of a cage with a bird sitting in it.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1337. 1337Having often made you, by my letters, acquainted with the things which have happened, I think I ought not to be silent as to the events of the last few days, which--... Having several times-- Having many times rejoiced with you by letters over your prosperous...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 96 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 96. Why an object is less distinct when brought near to the eye, and why with spectacles, or without the naked eye sees badly either close or far off [as the case may be].
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 515 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 515. THAT THE LIGHT FOR DRAWING FROM NATURE SHOULD BE HIGH UP. The light for drawing from nature should come from the North in order that it may not vary. And if you have it from the South, keep the window screened with cloth, so that with the sun shining the whole day...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1297 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1297. PROPHECIES. There will be many which will increase in their destruction. (The Ball of Snow rolling over Snow.) There will be many who, forgetting their existence and their name, will lie as dead on the spoils of other dead creatures. (Sleeping on the Feathers...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 868 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 868. The principles of astronomical perspective (868--873).Beyond the sun and us there is darkness and so the air appears blue. 445 FOOTNOTES 140:445 : Compare Vol. I, No. 301.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 75 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 75. p. 46 If the judgment of the eye is situated within it, the straight lines of the images are refracted on its surface because they pass through the rarer to the denser medium. If, when you are under water, you look at objects in the air you will see them out...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 652 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 652. HE WHO DESPISES PAINTING LOVES NEITHER PHILOSOPHY NOR NATURE. If you condemn painting, which is the only imitator of all visible works of nature, you will certainly despise a subtle invention which brings philosophy and subtle speculation to the considerati...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1414 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1414. Memoranda after 1500 (1414--1434)Paul of Vannochio at Siena... The upper chamber for the apostles. Buildings by Bramante. The governor of the castle made a prisoner. 727 Giovanni della Rosa deprived of his money. 728 Borgonzio began...; and moreover his fortunes...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 770. p. 77 I. ON FISSURES IN WALLS. First write the treatise on the causes of the giving way of walls and then, separately, treat of the remedies. Parallel fissures constantly occur in buildings which are erected on a hill side, when the hill is composed of stratified...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 77 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1216. Nonentity.Every quantity is intellectually conceivable as infinitely divisible. [Amid the vastness of the things among which we live, the existence of nothingness holds the first place; its function extends over all things that have no existence, and p. 309 its...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 148 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 148. p. 87 SECOND BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. THAT PORTION OF A BODY IN LIGHT AND SHADE WILL BE LEAST LUMINOUS WHICH IS SEEN UNDER THE LEAST AMOUNT OF LIGHT. Gradations of strength in the shadows (148. 149).That part of the object which is marked "m" is in the highest...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 92 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 92. WHY WHEN AN OBJECT IS PLACED CLOSE TO THE EYE ITS EDGES ARE INDISTINCT. When an object opposite the eye is brought too close to it, its edges must become too confused to be distinguished; as it happens with objects close to a light, which cast a large and indistinct...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 511 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 511. The different kinds of light afforded in cellars by various forms of windows. The p. 256 least useful and the coldest is the window at "a". The most useful, the lightest and warmest and most open to the sky is the window at "b". The window at "c" is of medium...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 268 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 268. The surface of every opaque body is affected by the colour of the objects surrounding it. But this effect will be strong or weak in proportion as those objects are more or less remote and more or less strongly [coloured].
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1270 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1270. A FABLE. The ant found a grain of millet. The seed feeling itself taken prisoner cried out to her: "If you will do me the kindness to allow me accomplish my function of reproduction, I will give you a hundred such as I am." And so it was. A Spider found a bunch...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 828 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 828. p. 122 Advantages in the structure of the eye in certain animals (828-831).Every object we see will appear larger at midnight than at midday, and larger in the morning than at midday. This happens because the pupil of the eye is much smaller at midday than at any...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1341. To my illustrious Lord, Lodovico, Duke of Bari, Leonardo da Vinci of Florence-- Leonardo. 674 FOOTNOTES 398:674 : Evidently a note of the superscription of a letter to the Duke, and written, like the foregoing from left to right. The manuscript containing it is...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1088 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1088. Majorca.Circumfulgore is a naval machine. It was an invention of the men of Majorca. 603 FOOTNOTES 260:603 : The machine is fully described in the MS. and shown in a sketch.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 31 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 680. p. 355 List of drawings. A head, full face, of a young man with fine flowing hair, Many flowers drawn from nature, A head, full face, with curly hair, Certain figures of Saint Jerome, The measurements of a figure, Drawings of furnaces. A head of the Duke, many...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 31 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 450. p. 226 OF THE SPACES [SHOWING THE SKY] IN TREES THEMSELVES. The appearance of trees in the distance (450. 451).The spaces between the parts in the mass of trees, and the spaces between the trees in the air, are, at great distances, invisible to the eye; for, where...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 215 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 215. p. 119 Although the breadth and length of lights and shadow will be narrower and shorter in foreshortening, the quality and quantity of the light and shade is not increased nor diminished. The function of shade and light when diminished by foreshortening, will be...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 876 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 876. p. 146 It is impossible that the side of a spherical mirror, illuminated by the sun, should reflect its radiance unless this mirror were undulating or filled with bubbles. You see here the sun which lights up the moon, a spherical mirror, and all of its surface...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 69 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1214. OF SPIRITS. We have said, on the other side of this page, that the definition of a spirit is a power conjoined to a body; because it cannot p. 306 move of its own accord, nor can it have any kind of motion in space; and if you were to say that it moves itself...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1071 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1071. p. 250 At Bordeaux in Gascony the sea rises about 40 braccia before its ebb, and the river there is filled with salt water for more than a hundred and fifty miles; and the vessels which are repaired there rest high and dry on a high hill above the sea at low tide...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1289 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1289. An old man was publicly casting contempt on a young one, and boldly showing that he did not fear him; on which the young man replied that his advanced age served him better as a shield than either his tongue or his strength.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 276 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 276. OF THE COLOURS OF SIMPLE DERIVED SHADOWS. The colour of derived shadows is always affected by that of the body towards which they are cast. To prove this: let an opaque body be placed between the plane "s c t d" and the blue light "d e" and the red light "a b"...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 262 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 262. The more brilliant the light given by a luminous body, the deeper will the shadows be cast by the objects it illuminates. p. 140
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1096 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1096. Very many times the Nile and other very large rivers have poured out their whole element of water and restored it to the sea.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1514 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1514. p. 455 Item for each vault 7 lire outlay for blue and gold 3 1/2 time, 4 days for the windows 1 1/2 The cornice below the windows 16 soldi per braccio item for 24 pictures of Roman history 14 lire each The philosophers 10 lire the pilasters, one ounce of blue 10...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 836 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 836. The seat of the common sense.The Common Sense, is that which judges of things offered to it by the other senses. The ancient speculators have concluded that that part of man which constitutes his judgment is caused by a central organ to which the other five senses...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 62 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 385. A man who wants to send an arrow very far from the bow must be standing entirely on one foot and raising the other so far from the foot he stands on as to afford the requisite counterpoise to his body which is thrown on the front foot. And he must not hold his arm...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 156 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 156. OF PAINTING. Among objects in various degrees of shade, when the light proceeds from a single source, p. 90 there will be the same proportion in their shadows as in the natural diminution of the light and the same must be understood of the degrees of light.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 764 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 764. p. 72 393 FOOTNOTES 72:393 : No explanation can be offered of the meaning of the letter B, which precedes each name. It may be meant for "basa" (base). Perhaps it refers to some author on architecture or an architect (Bramante?) who employed the designations, thus...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 891 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 891. A METHOD OF SEEING THE SUN ECLIPSED WITHOUT PAIN TO THE EYE. Take a piece of paper and pierce holes in it with a needle, and look at the sun through these holes.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 552 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 552. OF HELPING THE APPARENT RELIEF OF A PICTURE BY GIVING IT ARTIFICIAL LIGHT AND SHADE. To increase relief of a picture you may place, between your figure and the solid object on which its shadow falls, a line of bright light, dividing the figure from the object...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1549 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1549. Tuesday bread S 6 meat S 11 wine S 7 fruit S 9 soup S 2 salad S 1 855 Section title: Notes by unknown hands. FOOTNOTES 464:855 : 1548, 1549. On the same sheet is the text No. 1015 in Leonardo's own handwriting.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1233 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1233. PRIDE. The falcon, by reason of its haughtiness and pride, is fain to lord it and rule over all the other birds of prey, and longs to be sole and supreme; and very often the falcon has been seen to assault the eagle, the Queen of birds. p. 321 ABSTINENCE. The wild...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 712 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 712. All the heads of the large nails. 337 FOOTNOTES 12:337 : See Pl. LXXVI, No. i. This drawing has already been published in the "Saggio delle Opere di L. da Vinci"." Milano 1872, Pl. XXIV, No. i. But, for various reasons I cannot regard the editor's suggestions...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1457 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1457. Paolo of Tavechia, to see the marks in the German stones. 786 FOOTNOTES 438:786 : This note occurs on a pen and ink drawing made by Leonardo as a sketch for the celebrated large cartoon in the possession of the Royal Academy of Arts, in London. This cartoon is...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 957 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 957. Book 9 of the meeting of rivers and their flow and ebb. The cause is the same in the sea, where it is caused by the straits of Gibraltar. And again it is caused by whirlpools.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 611 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 611. People were to be seen eagerly embarking victuals on various kinds of hastily made barks. But little of the waves were visible in those places where the dark clouds and rain were reflected. But where the flashes caused by the bolts of heaven were reflected, there...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 315. From the eyebrow to the junction of the lip with the chin, and the angle of the jaw and the upper angle where the ear joins the temple will be a perfect square. And each side by itself is half the head. The hollow of the cheek bone occurs half way between the tip...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1557 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1557. Either you say Hesperia alone, and it will mean Italy, or you add ultima, and it will mean Spain. Umbria, part of Tuscany. 858 859 FOOTNOTES 466:858 : AMORETTI, Mem. Stor. XXIV, quotes the first three lines of this letter as by Leonardo. The cha- racter...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 115 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 115. OF PAINTING. As regards all visible objects 3 things must be considered. These are the position of the eye which sees: that of the object seen [with regard] to the light, and the position of the light which illuminates the object, "b" is the eye, "a" the object...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 20. The painter who draws merely by practice and by eye, without any reason, is like a mirror which copies every thing placed in front of it without being conscious of their existence.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 72 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 467. p. 235 OF TOWNS OR OTHER BUILDINGS SEEN IN THE EVENING OR THE MORNING THROUGH THE MIST. Of buildings seen at a great distance in the evening or the morning, as in mist or dense atmosphere, only those portions are seen in brightness which are lighted up by the sun...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 949 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 949. THAT THE OCEAN DOES NOT PENETRATE UNDER THE EARTH. The ocean does not penetrate under the earth, and this we learn from the many and various springs of fresh water which, in many parts of the ocean make their way up from the bottom to the surface. The same thing is...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1333 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1333. p. 378 Tricks (1333-1335).We are two brothers, each of us has a brother. Here the way of saying it makes it appear that the two brothers have become four.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1032 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1032. The lake of Pusiano flows into the lake of Segrino 555 and of Annone and of Sala. The lake of Annone is 22 braccia higher at the surface of its water than the surface of the water of the lake of Lecco, and the lake of Pusiano is 20 braccia higher than the lake...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 793. p. 98 V. ON THE RESISTANCE OF BEAMS. That angle will offer the greatest resistance which is most acute, and the most obtuse will be the weakest. 406 FOOTNOTES 98:406 : The three smaller sketches accompany the text in the original, but the larger one is not directly...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1227 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1227. JUSTICE. We may liken the virtue of Justice to the king of the bees which orders and arranges every thing with judgment. For some bees are ordered to go to the flowers, others are ordered to labour, others to fight with the wasps, others to clear away all dirt...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. B : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 38 B. THE THEORY OF DOME ARCHITECTURE. This subject has been more extensively treated by Leonardo in drawings than in writing. Still we may fairly assume that it was his purpose, ultimately to embody the results of his investigation in a "Trattato delle Cupole."...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 546 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 546. OF PAINTING. The size of the figures represented ought to show you the distance they are seen from. If you see a figure as large as nature you know it appears to be close to the eye.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 943 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 943. OF CERTAIN PERSONS WHO SAY THE WATERS WERE HIGHER THAN THE DRY LAND. Certainly I wonder not a little at the common opinion which is contrary to truth, but held by the universal consent of the judgment of men. And this is that all are agreed that the surface...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1443 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1443. Messer Francesco, physician of Lucca, with the Cardinal Farnese. 757 FOOTNOTES 433:757 : "Alessandro Farnese", afterwards Pope Paul III was created in 1493 Cardinal di San Cosimo e San Damiano, by Alexander VI.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 605 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 605. Of depicting a tempest (605. 606).Describe a wind on land and at sea. Describe a storm of rain.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 706 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 706. p. 9 OF A STATUE. Some practical hints (706-709).If you wish to make a figure in marble, first make one of clay, and when you have finished it, let it dry and place it in a case which should be large enough, after the figure is taken out of it, to receive also...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 20 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1158. There is no certainty in sciences where one of the mathematical sciences cannot be applied, or which are not in relation with these mathematics.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 78 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 461. OF PAINTING. In landscapes which represent [a scene in] winter. The mountains should not be shown blue, as we see in the mountains in the summer. And this is proved 226 in the 4th of this which says: Among mountains seen from a great distance those will look...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1038 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1038. Siena, "a b" 4 braccia, "a c" 10 braccia. Steps at [the castle of] Urbino. 563 FOOTNOTES 240:563 : See Pl. CX No. 3; compare also No. 765.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 81 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 457. p. 230 In the composition of leafy trees be careful not to repeat too often the same colour of one tree against the same colour of another [behind it]; but vary it with a lighter, or a darker, or a stronger green.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 558 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 558. p. 281 OF THE WAY TO MAKE THE SHADOW ON FIGURES CORRESPOND TO THE LIGHT AND TO [THE COLOUR] OF THE BODY. When you draw a figure and you wish to see whether the shadow is the proper complement to the light, and neither redder nor yellower than is the nature...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1543 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1543. p. 462 New tin-ware 3 pairs of sheets 6 small bowls, each of 4 breadths, 6 bowls, 2 small sheets, 2 large dishes, 2 tablecloths and J/2, 2 dishes medium size, 16 coarse cloths, 2 small ones 8 shirts, Old tin-ware 9 napkins, 3 small bowls, 2 hand-towels. 4 bowls, 3...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 235 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 235. The importance of light and shade in the perspective of disappearance (235-239).An opaque body seen in a line in which the light falls will reveal no prominences to the eye. For instance, let "a" be the solid body and "c" the light; "c m" and "c n" will be...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1239 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1239. THE OYSTER.--FOR TREACHERY. This creature, when the moon is full opens itself wide, and when the crab looks in he throws in a piece of rock or seaweed and the oyster cannot close again, whereby it serves for food to that crab. This is what happens to him who opens...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 358. "a b" the tendon and ankle in raising the heel approach each other by a finger's breadth; in lowering it they separate by a finger's breadth. 176 FOOTNOTES 188:176 : See Pl. XXII, No. 2. Compare this facsimile and text with Pl. III, No. 2, and p. 152 of MANZI'S...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 787. PLAN. Here it is shown how the arches made in the side of the octagon thrust the piers p. 94 of the angles outwards, as is shown by the line h c and by the line "t d" which thrust out the pier "m"; that is they tend to force it away from the centre of such...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 718 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 718. Measurement of the Sicilian horse the leg from behind, seen in front, lifted and extended. 341 FOOTNOTES 14:341 : There is no sketch belonging to this passage. Galeazze here probably means Galeazze di San Severino, the famous captain who married Bianca the daughter...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1327 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1327. p. 376 The cloth which is held in the hand in the current of a running stream, in the waters of which the cloth leaves all its foulness and dirt, is meant to signify this &c By the thorn with inoculated good fruit is signified those natures which of themselves...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 66 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 473. That portion of a tree which is farthest from the force which strikes it is the most injured by the blow because it bears most strain; thus nature has foreseen this case by thickening them in that part where they can be most hurt; and most in such trees as grow...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 14. ON THE THREE BRANCHES OF PERSPECTIVE. The plan of the book on Painting (14--17).There are three branches of perspective; the first deals with the reasons of the (apparent) diminution of objects as they recede from the eye, and is known as Diminishing Perspective...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 141 "V." "THEORY OF COLOURS." Leonardo's theory of colours is even more intimately connected with his principles of light and shade than his Perspective of Disappearance and is in fact merely an appendix or supplement to those principles, as we gather from the titles...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 63 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1206. Oh! speculators on perpetual motion how many vain projects of the like character you have created! Go and be the companions of the searchers for gold. 644 FOOTNOTES 301:644 : Another short passage in MS. I, referring also to speculators, is given by LIBRI (Hist...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 646 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 646. TO DILUTE WHITE WINE AND MAKE IT PURPLE. Powder gall nuts and let this stand 8 days in the white wine; and in the same way dissolve vitriol in water, and let the water stand and settle very clear, and the wine likewise, each by itself, and strain them well;...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1400 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1400. Give your master the instance of a captain who does not himself win the victory, but the soldiers do by his counsels; and so he still deserves the reward.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 61 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 61. p. 38 All bodies together, and each by itself, give off to the surrounding air an infinite number of images which are all-pervading and each complete, each conveying the nature, colour and form of the body which produces it. It can clearly be shown that all bodies...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1283 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1283. An artizan often going to visit a great gentleman without any definite purpose, the gentleman asked him what he did this for. The other said that he came there to have a pleasure which his lordship could not have; p. 349 since to him it was a satisfaction to see...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 34 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1369. Notes bearing Dates (1369--1378).The day of Santa Maria "della Neve" [of the Snows] August the 2nd 1473. 696 FOOTNOTES 415:696 : 1369. This date is on a drawing of a rocky landscape. See "Chronique des Arts" 1881 no. 23: Leonard de Vinci a-t-il ete au Righi le 5...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 68 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 379. A man coming down hill takes little steps, because the weight rests upon the hinder foot, while a man mounting takes wide steps, because his weight rests on the foremost foot. 187 FOOTNOTES 197:187 : See Pl. XXIII, No. 4.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1264 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1264. MAGNANIMITY. The falcon never seizes any but large birds and will sooner die than eat [tainted] meat of bad savour.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 505 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 505. OF THE MEANS OF ACQUIRING UNIVERSALITY. It is an easy matter to men to acquire universality, for all terrestrial animals resemble each other as to their limbs, that is in their muscles, sinews and bones; and they do not vary excepting in length or in thickness...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 86 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 86. The angle of sight varies with the distance (86-88)A simple and natural method; showing how objects appear to the eye without any other medium. p. 55 The object that is nearest to the eye always seems larger than another of the same size at greater distance. The eye...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 285 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 285. p. 152 An object represented in white and black will display stronger relief than in any other way; hence I would remind you O Painter! to dress your figures in the lightest colours you can, since, if you put them in dark colours, they will be in too slight relief...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 221 "XVII." "TOPOGRAPHICAL NOTES." A large part of the texts published in this section might perhaps have found their proper place in connection with the foregoing chapters on Physical Geography. But these observations on Physical Geography, of whatever kind they may...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1065 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1065. At Parma, at 'La Campana' on the twenty-fifth of October 1514. 582 A note on the petrifactions, or fossils near Parma will be found under No. 989.] FOOTNOTES 247:582 2: "Capano", an Inn.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 658 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 658. As soon as the poet ceases to represent in words what exists in nature, he in fact ceases to resemble the painter; for if the poet, leaving such representation, proceeds to describe the flowery and flattering speech of the figure, which he wishes to make...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 201 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 201. p. 112 "A n" will be darker than "c r" in proportion to the number of times that "a b" goes into "c d".
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 862 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 862. p. 139 Supposing the earth at our antipodes which supports the ocean were to rise and stand uncovered, far out of the sea, but remaining almost level, by what means afterwards, in the course of time, would mountains and vallies be formed? And the rocks with their...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 25 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 398. OF THE SCARS ON TREES. The scars on trees grow to a greater thickness than is required by the sap of the limb which nourishes them.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 98 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 98. PERSPECTIVE. No second object can be so much lower than the first as that the eye will not see it higher than the first, if the eye is above the second. PERSPECTIVE. And this second object will never be so much higher than the first as that the eye, being below them...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 885 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 885. OF THE PROOF THAT THE SUN IS HOT BY NATURE AND NOT BY VIRTUE. Of the nature of Sunlight.That the heat of the sun resides in its nature and not in its virtue [or mode of p. 152 action] is abundantly proved by the radiance of the solar body on which the human eye...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 142 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 142. Why the 2 lights one on each side of a body having two pyramidal sides of an obtuse apex leave it devoid of shadow. 63 FOOTNOTES 84:63 : The sketch illustrating this is on Plate No 1.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 822 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 822. OF THE PALM OF THE HAND. Comparative study of the structure of bones and of the action of muscles (822-826).Then I will discourse of the hands of each animal to show in what they vary; as in the bear, which has the ligatures of the sinews of the toes joined above...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 76 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 369. A sitting man cannot raise himself if that part of his body which is front of his axis [centre of gravity] does not weigh more than that which is behind that axis [or centre] without using his arms. p. 194 A man who is mounting any slope finds that he must...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1500 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1500. Tryphon of Alexandria, who spent his life at Apollonia, a city of Albania (163). 836 FOOTNOTES 452:836 : Tryphon of Alexandria, a Greek Grammarian of the time of Augustus. His treatise appeared first at Milan in 1476, in Constantin Laskaris's Greek Grammar.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1082 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1082. The Danube.That the valleys were formerly in great part covered by lakes the soil of which always forms the banks of rivers,--and by seas, which afterwards, by the persistent wearing of the rivers, cut through the mountains and the wandering courses of the rivers...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 866 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 866. In your discourse you must prove that the earth is a star much like the moon, and the glory of our universe; and then you must treat of the size of various stars, according to the authors.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 205 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 205. OF REVERBERATION. On reverberation. Reverberation is caused by bodies of a bright nature with a flat and semi opaque surface which, when the light strikes upon them, throw it back again, like the rebound of a ball, to the former object. p. 114 WHERE THERE CAN BE NO...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 402. WHY, VERY FREQUENTLY, TIMBER HAS VEINS THAT ARE NOT STRAIGHT. When the branches which grow the second year above the branch of the preceding year, are not of equal thickness above the antecedent branches, but are on one side, then the vigour of the lower branch is...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 79 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 283 "XIX." "PHILOSOPHICAL MAXIMS. MORALS. POLEMICS AND SPECULATIONS". Vasari indulges in severe strictures on Leonardo's religious views. He speaks, among other things, of his "capricci nel filosofar delle cose naturali and says on this point: Per il che fece...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1299 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1299. Blood will be seen issuing from the torn flesh of men, and trickling down the surface. Men will have such cruel maladies that they will tear their flesh with their own nails. (The Itch.) Plants will be seen left without leaves, and the rivers standing still...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1061 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1061. In the mountains of Verona the red marble is found all mixed with cockle shells turned into stone; some of them have been filled at the mouth with the cement which is the substance of the stone; and in some parts they have remained separate from the mass...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 281 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 281. PERSPECTIVE. On the reflection of colours (281-283).Every object devoid of colour in itself is more or less tinged by the colour [of the object] placed opposite. This may be seen by experience, inasmuch as any object which mirrors another assumes the colour...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 266 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 266. An image produced in a mirror is affected by the colour of the mirror.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 72 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 374. OF DRAWING. When a man who is running wants to neutralise the impetus that carries him on he prepares a contrary impetus which is generated by his hanging backwards. This can be proved, since, if the impetus carries a moving body with a momentum equal to 4...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 826 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 826. OF THE WAY OF WALKING IN MAN. The walking of man is always after the universal manner of walking in animals with 4 legs, inasmuch as just as they move their feet crosswise after the manner of a horse in trotting, so man moves his 4 limbs crosswise; that is, if he...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1086 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1086. Tunis.The greatest ebb made anywhere by the Mediterranean is above Tunis, being about two and a half braccia and at Venice it falls two braccia. In all the rest of the Mediterranean sea the fall is little or none.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1504 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1504. On the 9th day of August, 1504, I took 10 florins in gold.... on Friday the 9th day of August fifteen grossoni that is fl. 5 S 5.... given to me 1 florin in gold on the l2th day of August ..... on the 14th of August, 32 grossoni to Tommaso. On the l8th of the same...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 146 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 146. The law of the incidence of light.The edges of a window which are illuminated by 2 lights of equal degrees of brightness will not reflect light of equal brightness into the chamber within. If "b" is a candle and "a c" our hemisphere both will illuminate the edges...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 881 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 881. Epicurus perhaps saw the shadows cast by columns on the walls in front of them equal in diameter to the columns from which the p. 150 shadows were cast; and the breadth of the shadows being parallel from beginning to end, he thought he might infer that the sun also...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1287 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1287. A man gave up his intimacy with one of his friends because he often spoke ill of his other friends. The neglected friend one day lamenting to this former friend, after much complaining, entreated him to say what might be the cause that had made him forget so much...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 878 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 878. The sun will appear larger in moving water or on waves than in still water; an example is the light reflected on the strings of a monochord.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 65 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 65. PERSPECTIVE. The air is filled with endless images of the objects distributed in it; and all are represented in all, and all in one, and all in each, whence it happens that if two mirrors are placed in such a manner as to face each other exactly, the first will be...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 67 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1202. The lover is moved by the beloved object as the senses are by sensible objects; and they unite and become one and the same thing. The work is the first thing born of this union; if the thing loved is base the lover becomes base. When the thing taken into union is...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1404 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1404. Giovannina, has a fantastic face,--is at Santa Caterina, at the Hospital. 722 FOOTNOTES 425:722 : Compare the text on the same page: No. 667.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 642 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 642. Nitre, vitriol, cinnabar, alum, salt ammoniac, sublimated mercury, rock salt, alcali salt, common salt, rock alum, alum schist (?), arsenic, sublimate, realgar, tartar, orpiment, verdegris.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 158 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 158. p. 91 THIRD BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. Definition of derived shadow (158. 159).Derived shadow cannot exist without primary shadow. This is proved by the first of this which says: Darkness is the total absence of light, and shadow is an alleviation of darkness...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 501 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 501. OF THE MISERABLE PRETENCES MADE BY THOSE WHO FALSELY AND UNWORTHILY ACQUIRE THE NAME OF PAINTERS. Now there is a certain race of painters who, having studied but little, must need take as their standard of beauty mere gold and azure, and these, with supreme conceit...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 82 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 82. An experiment showing that though the pupil may not be moved from its position the objects seen by it may appear to move from their places. If you look at an object at some distance from you and which is below the eye, and fix both your eyes upon it and with one...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 278 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 278. OF PAINTING. 124 Since white is not a colour but the neutral recipient of every colour 125 , when it is seen in the open air and high up, all its shadows are bluish; and this is caused, according to the 4th [prop.], which says: the surface of every opaque body...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 21 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 690. Constancy does not begin, but is that which perseveres. 325 FOOTNOTES 358:325 : A drawing in red chalk, also rubbed, which stands in the original in the middle of this text, seems to me to be intended for a sword hilt, held in a fist.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 30 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1373. On Wednesday at seven o'clock died Ser Piero da Vinci on the 9th of July 1504. 700 FOOTNOTES 416:700 : This and the previous text it may be remarked are the only mention made by Leonardo of his father; Nos. 1526, 1527 and No. 1463 are of the year 1504.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1098 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1098. It is not denied that the Nile is constantly muddy in entering the Egyptian sea and that its turbidity is caused by soil that this river is continually bringing from the places it passes; which soil never returns in the sea which receives it, unless it throws it...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 838 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 838. HOW THE FIVE SENSES ARE THE MINISTERS OF THE SOUL. On the relations of the soul to the organs of sense.The soul seems to reside in the judgment, and the judgment would seem to be seated in that part where all the senses meet; and this is called the Common Sense...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1260 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1260. THE HIPPOPOTAMUS. This beast when it feels itself over-full goes about seeking thorns, or where there may be the remains of canes that have been p. 333 split, and it rubs against them till a vein is opened; then when the blood has flowed as much as he needs, he...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 231 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 231. The outlines of objects will be least clear when they are nearest to the eye, and therefore remoter outlines will be clearer. Among objects which are smaller than the pupil of the eye those will be less distinct which are nearer to the eye.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1547 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1547. Johannes Antonius di Johannes Ambro- sius de Bolate. He who lets time pass and does not grow in virtue, the more I think of it the more I grieve. No man has it in him to be virtuous who will give up honour for gain. Good fortune is valueless to him who knows not...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 31 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 362. p. 190 OF PAINTING. The proportions varyat different ages (362-367).Indicate which are the muscles, and which the tendons, which become prominent or retreat in the different movements of each limb; or which do neither [but are passive]. And remember that these...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 85 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 453. All trees seen against the sun are dark towards the middle and this shadow will be of the shape of the tree when apart from others. The shadows cast by trees on which the sun shines are as dark as those of the middle of the tree. The shadow cast by a tree is never...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 62 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 477. OF CLOUDS, SMOKE AND DUST AND THE FLAMES OF A FURNACE OR OF A BURNING KILN. The clouds do not show their rounded forms excepting on the sides which face the sun; on the others the roundness is imperceptible because they are in the shade. 231 p. 239 If the sun is...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 10. INTRODUCTION. I know that many will call this useless work 7 ; and they will be those of whom Demetrius 8 declared that he took no more p. 14 account of the wind that came out their mouth in words, than of that they expelled from their lower parts: men who desire...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1323 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1323. The pen must necessarily have the penknife for a companion, and it is a useful companionship, for one is not good for much without the other.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 959 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 959. That the flow and ebb are not general; for on the shore at Genoa there is none, at Venice two braccia, between England and Flanders 18 braccia. That in the straits of Sicily the current is very strong because all the waters from the rivers that flow ...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1459 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1459. On the last day but one of September; Thursday the 27th day of September Maestro Tommaso came back and worked for himself until the last day but one of February. On the 18th day of March, 1493, Giulio, a German, came to live with me,--Lucia, Piero, Leonardo...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1022 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1022. On the 10th day of December at 9 o'clock a. m. fire was set to the place. On the l8th day of December 1511 at 9 o'clock a. m. this second fire was kindled by the Swiss at Milan at the place called DCXC. 548 FOOTNOTES 235:548 : With these two texts, (l. 1--2 and l...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 542 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 542. WHY GROUPS OF FIGURES ONE ABOVE ANOTHER ARE TO BE AVOIDED. The universal practice which painters adopt on the walls of chapels is greatly and reasonably to be condemned. Inasmuch as they represent one historical subject on one level with a landscape and buildings...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1223 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1223. GRATITUDE. The virtue of gratitude is said to be more [developed] in the birds called hoopoes which, knowing the benefits of life and food, they have received from their father and their mother, when they see them grow old, make a nest for them and brood over them...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. F : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 63 "F. THE PROJECT FOR LIFTING UP THE BATTISTERO OF FLORENCE AND SETTING IT ON A BASEMENT." Among the very few details Vasari gives as to the architectural studies of Leonardo, we read: "And among these models and designs there was one by way of which he showed...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1559 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1559. Canonica of... on the 5th of July 1507; my dearly beloved mother, sisters and cousin I herewith inform you that thanks to God I am... about the sword which I ... bring it to Maso at the piazza... and I will settle the business of Piero so that...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 419 "XXII." "MISCELLANEOUS NOTES." The incidental memoranda scattered here and there throughout the MSS. can have been for the most part intelligible to the writer only; in many cases their meaning and connection are all the more obscure because we are in ignorance...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 601 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 601. p. 301 V. SUGGESTIONS FOR COMPOSITIONS. OF THE WAY OF REPRESENTING A BATTLE. Of painting battle pieces (601-603).First you must represent the smoke of artillery mingling in the air with the dust and tossed up by the movement of horses and the combatants. And this...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 947 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 947. For the third and last reason we will say that salt is in all created things; and this we learn from water passed over the ashes and cinders of burnt things; and the urine of every animal, and the superfluities issuing from their bodies, and the earth into which...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 24 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1153. Experience never errs; it is only your judgments that err by promising themselves effects such as are not caused by your experiments. Experience does not err; only your judgments err by expecting from her what is not in her power. Men wrongly compl...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 617 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 617. Very excellent will be a stiff white paper, made of the usual mixture and filtered milk of an herb called calves foot; and when this paper is prepared and damped and folded and wrapped up it may be mixed with the mixture and thus left to dry; but if you break it...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 951 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 951. HERE THE REASON IS GIVEN OF THE EFFECTS PRODUCED BY THE WATERS IN THE ABOVE MENTIONED PLACE. All the lakes and all the gulfs of the sea and all inland seas are due to rivers which distribute their waters into them, and from impediments in their downfall ...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 714 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 714. Salt may be made from human excrements, burnt and calcined, made into lees and dried slowly at a fire, and all the excrements produce salt in a similar way and these salts when distilled, are very strong. 338 FOOTNOTES 13:338 : VASARI repeatedly states...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 32 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1172. The acquisition of any knowledge is always of use to the intellect, because it may thus drive out useless things and retain the good. For nothing can be loved or hated unless it is first known.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 554 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 554. OF THE JUDGMENT TO BE MADE OF A PAINTER'S WORK. First you must consider whether the figures have the relief required by their situation and the light which illuminates them; for the shadows should not be the same at the extreme ends of the composition ...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 354. OF THE MOTIONS OF THE FINGERS. The movements of the fingers principally consist in extending and bending them. This extension and bending vary in manner; that is, sometimes they bend altogether at the first joint; sometimes they bend, or extend, half way...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1235 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1235. THE EAGLE. The eagle when it is old flies so high that it scorches its feathers, and Nature allowing that it should renew its youth, it falls into shallow water 651 . And if its young ones cannot bear to gaze on the sun 652 --; it does not feed them with any bird...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 239 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 239. An object which is [so brilliantly illuminated as to be] almost as bright as light will be visible at a greater distance, and of larger apparent size than is natural to objects so remote.
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 103 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 103. PERSPECTIVE. Let "f" be the level and distance of the eye; and "a" the vertical plane, as high as a man; let "e" be a man, then I say that on the plane this will be the distance from the plane to the 2nd man.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 74 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 465. OF LIGHT AND SHADOW IN A TOWN. On the treatment of light for views of towns (465-469). When the sun is in the East and the eye is above the centre of a town, the eye will p. 234 see the Southern part of the town with its roofs half in shade and half in light...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 22. Here [in the eye] forms, here colours, here the character of every part of the universe are concentrated to a point; and that point is so marvellous a thing... Oh! marvellous, O stupendous Necessity--by thy laws thou dost compel every effect to be the direct result...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1335 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1335. If you want to teach someone a subject you do not know yourself, let him measure the length of an object unknown to you, and he will learn the measure you did not know before;--Master Giovanni da Lodi.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 609 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 609. DESCRIPTION OF THE DELUGE. Let there be first represented the summit of a rugged mountain with valleys surrounding its base, and on its sides let the surface of the soil be seen to slide, together with the small roots of the bushes, denuding great portions...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 795. ON THE LENGTH OF BEAMS. That beam which is more than 20 times as long as its greatest thickness will be of brief duration and will break in half; and p. 99 remember, that the part built into the wall should be steeped in hot pitch and filleted with oak boards...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1034 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1034. p. 240 Notes on places in Central Italy, visited in 1502 (1034-1054).Pigeon-house at Urbino, the 30th day of July 1502. 559 FOOTNOTES 240:559 : An indistinct sketch is introduced with this text, in the original, in which the word "Scolatoro" (conduit) is written.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1551 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1551. On Monday, the l3th of February, I lent lire S 7 to Lionardo to spend, Friday d 7. 856 FOOTNOTES 465:856 : This note is followed by an account very like the one given as No. 1549.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 227 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 227. On indistinctness at short distances (227-231).If you place an opaque object in front of your eye at a distance of four fingers' breadth, if it is smaller than the space between the two eyes it will not interfere with your seeing any thing that may be beyond it. No...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 308. p. 169 Preliminary observations (308. 309).Every man, at three years old is half the full height he will grow to at last.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 113 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 113. p. 71 OF PAINTING. The conditions of shadow and light [as seen] by the eye are 3. Of these the first is when the eye and the light are on the same side of the object seen; the 2nd is when the eye is in front of the object and the light is behind it. The 3rd is when...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. Xx. Humorous : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XX. HUMOROUS WRITINGS Introduction 1220. 1221. 1222. 1223. 1224. 1225. 1226. 1227. 1228. 1229. 1230. 1231. 1232. 1233. 1234. 1235. 1236. 1237. 1238. 1239. 1240. 1241. 1242. 1243. 1244. 1245. 1246. 1247. 1248. 1249. 1250. 1251. 1252. 1253. 1254. 1255. 1256. 1257. 1258. 1259...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 517 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 517. PAINTING. The luminous air which enters by passing through orifices in walls into dark rooms will render the place less dark in proportion as the opening cuts into the walls which surround and cover in the pavement.
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 889 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 889. WHY THE SUN APPEARS LARGER WHEN SETTING THAN AT NOON, WHEN IT IS NEAR TO US. Every object seen through a curved medium seems to be of larger size than it is. 464 FOOTNOTES 153:464 : At A is written "sole" (the sun), at B "terra" (the earth).
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 94 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 94. PERSPECTIVE. There is no object so large but that at a great distance from the eye it does not appear smaller than a smaller object near.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 26 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1378. On the 24th of June, St John's day, 1518 at Amboise, in the palace of... 705 FOOTNOTES 417:705 : "Castello del clli". The meaning of this word is obscure; it is perhaps not written at full length.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1276 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1276. The plant complains of the old and dry stick which stands by its side and of the dry stakes that surround it. One keeps it upright, the other keeps it from low company.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1069 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1069. p. 249 II. FRANCE. GERMANY. a. Austria, b. Saxony. c. Nuremberg. d. Flanders. FRANCE. a. Picardy. b. Normandy. c. Dauphin. SPAIN. a. Biscay. b. Castille. c. Galicia. d. Portugal. e. Taragona. f. Granada. 586 FOOTNOTES 249:586 : Two slightly sketched maps, one...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1291 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1291. A JEST. A man was desired to rise from bed, because the sun was already risen. To which he replied: "If I had as far to go, and as much to do as he has, I should be risen by now; but having but a little way to go, I shall not rise yet."
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 394. The relative thickness of the branches to the trunk (393--396).All the branches of a tree at every stage of its height when put together are equal in thickness to the trunk [below them]. All the branches of a water [course] at every stage of its course, if they are...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 73 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 73. The object which is opposite to the pupil of the eye is seen by that pupil and that which is opposite to the eye is seen by the pupil.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 71 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1212. There can be no voice where there is no motion or percussion of the air; there can be no percussion of the air where there is no instrument, there can be no instrument without a body; and this being so, a spirit can have neither voice, nor form, nor strength...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1412 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1412. MEMORANDUM. Maghino, Speculus of Master Giovanni the Frenchman; Galenus on utility.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 654 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 654. And if the poet gratifies the sense by means of the ear, the painter does so by the eye--the worthier sense; but I will say no more of this but that, if a good painter represents the fury of a battle, and if a poet describes one, and they are both together put...
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 270 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 270. OF THE RAYS WHICH CONVEY THROUGH THE AIR THE IMAGES OF OBJECTS. All the minutest parts of the image intersect each other without interfering with p. 145 each other. To prove this let "r" be one of the sides of the hole, opposite to which let "s" be the eye which...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1268 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1268. A FABLE. The vain and wandering butterfly, not content with being able to fly at its ease through the air, overcome by the tempting flame of the candle, decided to fly into it; but its sportive impulse was the cause of a sudden fall, for its delicate wings were...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 64 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 383. OF THE STRENGTH OF MAN. A man pulling a [dead] weight balanced against himself cannot pull more than his own weight. And if he has to raise it he will [be able to] raise as much more than his weight as his strength may be more than that of other men. 190...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 830 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 830. "a b n" is the membrane which closes the eye from below, upwards, with an opaque film, "c n b" encloses the eye in front and behind with a transparent membrane. It closes from below, upwards, because it [the eye] comes downwards. When the eye of a bird closes with...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 38 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1363. This writing distinctly about the kite seems to be my destiny, because among the first recollections of my infancy, it seemed to me that, as I was in my cradle, a kite came to me and opened my mouth with its tail, and struck me several times with its tail inside...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1090 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1090. p. 261 IV. THE LEVANT. The Levantine Sea.On the shores of the Mediterranean 300 rivers flow, and 40, 200 ports. And this sea is 3000 miles long. Many times has the increase of its waters, heaped up by their backward flow and the blowing of the West winds, caused...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 682. Obstacles cannot crush me Every obstacle yields to stern resolve He who is fixed to a star does not change his mind. 320 FOOTNOTES 356:320 : This text is written to elucidate two sketches which were obviously the first sketches for the drawings reproduced on PL...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 762 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 762. p. 70 THE WAY TO CONSTRUCT A FRAME-WORK FOR DECORATING BUILDINGS. Decorations for feasts.The way in which the poles ought to be placed for tying bunches of juniper on to them. These poles must lie close to the framework of the vaulting and tie the bunches on with...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 150 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 150. On the intensity of shadows as dependent on the distance from the light (150-152).The smaller the light that falls upon an object the more shadow it will display. And the light will illuminate a smaller portion of the object in proportion as it is nearer to it;...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 897 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 897. That the sun could not be mirrored in the body of the moon, which is a convex mirror, p. 160 in such a way as that so much of its surface as is illuminated by the sun, should reflect the sun unless the moon had a surface adapted to reflect it--in waves and ridges...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 509 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 509. p. 255 II. THE ARTIST'S STUDIO.--INSTRUMENTS AND HELPS FOR THE APPLICATION OF PERSPECTIVE.--ON JUDGING OF A PICTURE. On the size of the studio.Small rooms or dwellings discipline the mind, large ones weaken it. On the construction of windows (510-512).
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 870 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 870. p. 142 PERSPECTIVE. Among objects moved from the eye at equal distance, that undergoes least diminution which at first was most remote. When various objects are removed at equal distances farther from their original position, that which was at first the farthest...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 40 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " I. PROLEGOMENA AND GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK ON PAINTING Introduction 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 213 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 213. p. 118 SIXTH BOOK ON LIGHT AND SHADE. PERSPECTIVE. The effect of rays passing through holes (213. 214).If you transmit the rays of the sun through a hole in the shape of a star you will see a beautiful effect of perspective in the spot where the sun's rays fall...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 37 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 444. OF TREES TO THE SOUTH. The effects of morning light (444-448).When the sun is in the east the trees to the South and to the North have almost as much light as shadow. But a greater share of light in proportion as they lie to the West and a greater share of shadow...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 798 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 798. p. 110 THE ORDER OF THE BOOK. This depicting of mine of the human body will be as clear to you as if you had the natural man before you; and the reason is that if you wish thoroughly to know the parts of man, anatomically, you--or your eye--require to see it...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1077 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1077. If the river "m n", an affluant of the river Loire, were turned with its muddy waters, into the river of Romorantin, this would fatten p. 253 the land which it would water and would render the country fertile to supply food to the inhabitants, and would make...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 893 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 893. OF THE MOON AND WHETHER IT IS POLISHED AND SPHERICAL. The image of the sun in the moon is powerfully luminous, and is only on a small portion of its surface. And the proof may be seen by taking a ball of burnished gold and placing it in the dark with a light...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 766 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 766. The ancient architects...... beginning with the Egyptians (?) who, as Diodorus Siculus writes, were the first to build and construct large cities and castles, public and private buildings of fine form, large and well proportioned..... The column, which has its...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 154 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 154. OF PERSPECTIVE. The shaded and illuminated sides of opaque objects will display the same proportion of light and darkness as their objects 68 . FOOTNOTES 89:68 6: The meaning of "obbietti" (objects) is explained in no 153, lines 1-4.--Between the title-line...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 834 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 834. OF THE NATURE OF SIGHT. On the conditions of sight (834. 835).I say that sight is exercised by all animals, by the medium of light; and if any one adduces, as against this, the sight of nocturnal animals, I must say that this in the same way is subject to the very...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 60 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 387. Of delivering a blow to the right or left. 192 FOOTNOTES 199:192 : Four sketches on Pl. XXIV, No. 1 belong to this passage. The rest of the sketches and notes on that page are of a miscellaneous nature.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1094 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1094. The Egyptians, the Ethiopians, and the Arabs, in crossing the Nile with camels, are accustomed to attach two bags on the sides of the camel's bodies that is skins in the form shown underneath. In these four meshes of the net the camels for baggage place their feet...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 260 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 260. DIFFERENT PORTIONS OF A WALL SURFACE WILL BE DARKER OR BRIGHTER IN PROPORTION AS THE LIGHT OR SHADOW FALLS ON THEM AT A LARGER ANGLE. The foregoing proposition can be clearly proved in this way. Let us say that "m q" is the luminous body, then "f g" will be...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1516 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1516. Salai, 6 lire... 4 soldi... 10 soldi for a chain;-- On the l4th of March I had 13 lire S. 4; 16 lire remain.
Vol. I. V. Theory Of Colours. 274 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 274. OF THE INTERSECTIONS OF THE IMAGES IN THE PUPIL OF THE EYE. The intersections of the images as they enter the pupil do not mingle in confusion in the space where that intersection unites them; as is evident, since, if the rays of the sun pass through two panes...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1073 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1073. "c d" is the garden at Blois; "a b" is the conduit of Blois, made in France by Fra Giocondo, "b c" is what is wanting in the height of that conduit, "c d" is the height of the garden at Blois, "e f" is the siphon of the conduit, "b c", "e f", "f g" is where...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 217 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 217. THAT PART OF THE REFLECTION WILL BE BRIGHTEST WHERE THE REFLECTED RAYS ARE SHORTEST. The darkness occasioned by the casting of combined shadows will be in conformity with its cause, which will originate and terminate between two plane surfaces near together, alike...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 69 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 69. A parallel case.Just as a stone flung into the water becomes the centre and cause of many circles, and as sound diffuses itself in circles in the air: so any object, placed in the luminous atmosphere, diffuses itself in circles, and fills the surrounding air with...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 874 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 874. On the luminosity of the Earth in the universal space (874-878).In my book I propose to show, how the ocean and the other seas must, by means of the sun, make our world shine with the appearance of a moon, and to the remoter worlds it looks like a star; and this I...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1508 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1508. p. 454 How this proposition of Xenophon is false. If you take away unequal quantities from unequal quantities, but in the same proportion, &c 841 FOOTNOTES 454:841 : Xenophon's works were published several times during Leonardo's lifetime.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 22 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1339. Like a whirling wind which rushes down a sandy and hollow valley, and which, in its hasty course, drives to its centre every thing that opposes its furious course... No otherwise does the Northern blast whirl round in its tempestuous progress... 671 p. 395 N...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 33 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 704. A DRESS FOR THE CARNIVAL. To make a beautiful dress cut it in thin cloth and give it an odoriferous varnish, made of oil of turpentine and of varnish in grain, with a pierced stencil, which must be wetted, that it may not stick to the cloth; and this stencil may be...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1272 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1272. A FABLE. The razor having one day come forth from the handle which serves as its sheath and having placed himself in the sun, saw the sun reflected in his body, which filled him with great pride. And turning it over in his thoughts he began to say to himself: "...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 513 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 513. On the best light for painting (513-520).Which light is best for drawing from nature; whether high or low, or large or small, or strong and broad, or strong and small, or broad and weak or small and weak? 245 FOOTNOTES 257:245 : The question here put is unanswered...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 90 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 90. SIMPLE PERSPECTIVE. Simple perspective is that which is constructed by art on a vertical plane which is equally distant from the eye in every part. Complex perspective is that which is constructed on a ground-plan in which none of the parts are equally distant...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 75 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1218. The watery element was left enclosed between the raised banks of the rivers, and the sea was seen between the uplifted earth and the surrounding air which has to envelope and enclose the complicated machine of the earth, and whose mass, standing between the water...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 650 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 650. FIRE. Take away that yellow surface which covers oranges and distill them in an alembic, until the distillation may be said to be perfect. FIRE. Close a room tightly and have a brasier of brass or iron with fire in it and sprinkle on it two pints of aqua vitae...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1416 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1416. Piece of tapestry,-pair of compasses,-- Tommaso's book,--the book of Giovanni Benci,--the box in the custom-house,--to cut the cloth,--the sword-belt,--to sole the boots, --a light hat,--the cane from the ruined houses,--the debt for the table linen...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 77 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 77. THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE IMAGES OF BODIES PASS IN BETWEEN THE MARGINS OF THE OPENINGS BY WHICH THEY ENTER. The intersection of the rays (76-82).What difference is there in the way in which images pass through narrow openings and through large openings, or in those...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 209 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 209. Describe how it is that no object has its limitation in the mirror but in the eye which sees it in the mirror. For if you look at your face in the mirror, the part resembles the whole in as much as the part is everywhere in the mirror, and the whole is in every...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1295 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1295. p. 356 (Of the Avaricious.) There will be many who will eagerly and with great care and solicitude follow up a thing, which, if they only knew its malignity, would always terrify them. (Of those men, who, the older they grow, the more avaricious they become...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1030 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1030. LAKE OF COMO. VALLEY OF CHIAVENNA. Above the lake of Como towards Germany is the valley of Chiavenna where the river Mera flows into this lake. Here are barren and very high mountains, with huge rocks. Among these mountains are to be found the water-birds called...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 791. The window "a" is well placed under the window "c", and the window "b" is badly placed under the pier "d", because this latter is without support and foundation; mind therefore never to make a break under the piers between the windows.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 28 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1163. O Time! consumer of all things; O envious age! thou dost destroy all things and devour all things with the relentless teeth of years, little by little in a slow death. Helen, when she looked in her mirror, seeing the withered wrinkles made in her face by old age...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1331 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1331. The circular plans of carrying earth are very useful, inasmuch as men never stop in their work; and it is done in many ways. By one of these ways men carry the earth on their shoulders, by another in chests and others on wheelbarrows. The man who carries it on his...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 70 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 469. OF SMOKE AND DUST. If the sun is in the East the smoke of cities will not be visible in the West, because on that side it is not seen penetrated by the solar rays, nor on a dark background; since the roofs of the houses turn the same side to the eye as they turn...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 18. The use of the book on Painting.These rules are of use only in correcting the figures; since every man makes some mistakes in his first compositions and he who knows them not, cannot amend them. But you, knowing your errors, will correct your works and where you...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 117 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 117. OF PAINTING. OF THE THREE KINDS OF LIGHT THAT ILLUMINATE OPAQUE BODIES. Different sorts of light (117,118).The first kind of Light which may illuminate opaque bodies is called Direct light--as that of the sun or any other light from a window or flame. The second is...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 223 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 223. OF THE DIMINUTION IN PERSPECTIVE OF OPAQUE OBJECTS. Among opaque objects of equal size the apparent diminution of size will be in proportion to their distance from the eye of the spectator; but it is an inverse proportion, since, where the distance is greater...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1555 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1555. p. 466 Of things seen through a mist that which is nearest its farthest limit will be least visible, and all the more so as they are more remote.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 312. The cut or depression below the lower lip of the mouth is half way between the bottom of the nose and the bottom of the chin. The face forms a square in itself; that is its width is from the outer corner of one eye to the other, and its height is from the very top...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 955 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 955. The ebb and flow of the tide (955-960).Where there is a larger quantity of water, there is a greater flow and ebb, but the contrary in narrow waters. Look whether the sea is at its greatest flow when the moon is half way over our hemisphere [on the meridian].
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 613 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 613. Chalk dissolves in wine and in vinegar or in aqua fortis and can be recombined with gum.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 710 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 710. Notes on the casting of the Sforza monument (710-715).Three braces which bind the mould. [If you want to make simple casts quickly, make them in a box of river sand wetted with vinegar.] p. 11 [When you shall have made the mould upon the horse you must make...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 6. I am not to blame for putting forward, in the course of my work on science, any general rule derived from a previous conclusion.
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 779. p. 86 III. ON THE NATURE OF THE ARCH. WHAT IS AN ARCH? The arch is nothing else than a force originated by two weaknesses, for the arch in buildings is composed of two segments of a circle, each of which being very weak in itself tends to fall; but as each opposes...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1231 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1231. p. 320 CONSTANCY. Constancy may be symbolised by the phoenix which, knowing that by nature it must be resuscitated, has the constancy to endure the burning flames which consume it, and then it rises anew. INCONSTANCY. The swallow may serve for Inconstancy, for it...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. Introduction : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 1 "XI." "THE NOTES ON SCULPTURE." Compared with the mass of manuscript treating of Painting, a very small number of passages bearing on the practice and methods of Sculpture are to be found scattered through the note books; these are here given at the beginning...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 107 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 107. OF EQUAL OBJECTS THE MOST REMOTE LOOK THE SMALLEST. On natural perspective (107--109).The practice of perspective may be divided into... parts 50 , of which the first treats of objects seen by the eye at any distance; and it shows all these objects just as the eye...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 550 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 550. THAT SHADOWS CAST BY A PARTICULAR LIGHT SHOULD BE AVOIDED, BECAUSE THEY ARE EQUALLY STRONG AT THE ENDS AND AT THE BEGINNING. The shadows cast by the sun or any other particular light have not a pleasing effect on the body to which they belong, because the parts...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 89 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 480. When the air is condensed into rain it would produce a vacuum if the rest of the air did not prevent this by filling its place, as p. 240 it does with a violent rush; and this is the wind which rises in the summer time, accompanied by heavy rain.
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1130. Tymbals to be played like the monochord, or the soft flute. Here there is to be a cylinder of cane after the manner of clappers with a musical round called a Canon, which is sung in four parts; each singer singing the whole round. Therefore I here make a wheel...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 41. The art of perspective is of such a nature as to make what is flat appear in relief and what is in relief flat.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 920 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 920. DIVISIONS OF THE BOOK. Book 1 of water in itself. Book 2 of the sea. Book 3 of subterranean rivers. Book 4 of rivers. Book 5 of the nature of the abyss. Book 6 of the obstacles. Book 7 of gravels. Book 8 of the surface of water. Book 9 of the things placed there...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1420 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1420. Where is Valentino? 732 --boots,--boxes in the custom-house...,-- 733 the monk at the Carmine,--squares,-- 734 Piero Martelli,-- Salvi Borgherini,--send back the bags,--a support for the spectacles,-- 735 the nude study of San Gallo,--the cloak. Porphyry,--groups...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 43 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1174. p. 294 The water you touch in a river is the last of that which has passed, and the first of that which is coming. Thus it is with time present. Life if well spent, is long.
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 155 "VI." "'PROSPETTIVA DE' COLRI' (PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR)" "AND" "'PROSPETTIVA AEREA' (AERIAL PERSPECTIVE)." Leonardo distinctly separates these branches of his subject, as may be seen in the beginning of No. 295. Attempts have been made to cast doubts...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1380 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1380. This was done by Leone in the piazza of the castle with a chain and an arrow. 710 FOOTNOTES 422:710 : This note must have been made in Milan; as we know from the date of the MS.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1244 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1244. THE TARANTULA. The bite of the tarantula fixes a man's mind on one idea; that is on the thing he was thinking of when he was bitten. THE SCREECH-OWL AND THE OWL. These punish those who are scoffing at them by pecking out their eyes; for nature has so ordered it...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 48 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 345. Proportions of the arm (345-349).From the tip of the longest finger of the hand to the shoulder joint is four hands or, if you will, four faces. "a b c" are equal and each interval is 2 heads. 165 FOOTNOTES 183:165 : Lines 1-3 are given on Pl. XV below the front...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 248 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 248. Of objects equally dark in themselves and situated at a considerable and equal distance, that will look the darkest which is farthest above the earth.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1374. Begun by me, Leonardo da Vinci, on the l2th of July 1505. 701 FOOTNOTES 416:701 : Thus he writes on the first page of the MS. The title is on the foregoing coversheet as follows: Libro titolato disstrafformatione coe (cio) "d'un corpo nvn" (in un) altro sanz...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 525 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 525. If you want to represent a figure on a wall, the wall being foreshortened, while the figure is to appear in its proper form, and as standing free from the wall, you must proceed thus: have a thin plate of iron and make a small hole in the centre; this hole must be...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1045 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1045. The rock of the harbour of Cesena is four points towards the South West from Cesena.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. Xvii : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XVII. TOPOGRAPHICAL NOTES Introduction 1001. 1002. 1003. 1004. 1005. 1006. 1007. 1008. 1009. 1010. 1011. 1012. 1013. 1014. 1015. 1016. 1017. 1018. 1019. 1020. 1021. 1022. 1023. 1024. 1025. 1026. 1027. 1028. 1029. 1030. 1031. 1032. 1033. 1034. 1035. 1036. 1037. 1038. 1039...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 418. A leaf always turns its upper side towards the sky so that it may the better receive, on all its surface, the dew which drops gently from the atmosphere. And these leaves are so distributed on the plant as that one shall cover the other as little as possible, but...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 221 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 221. A body illuminated by the solar rays passing between the thick branches of trees will produce as many shadows as there are branches between the sun and itself. Where the shadow-rays from an opaque pyramidal body are intercepted they will cast a shadow of bifurcate...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 185 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 185. DEFINITION. The intersection "n" is produced by the shadows caused by the light "b", because this light "b" produces the shadow "x b", and the shadow "s b", but the intersection "m" is produced by the light "a" which causes the shadow "s a", and the shadow "x a"...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 162 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 162. OF SHADOW. Derived shadows are of three kinds of which one is spreading, the second columnar, the third converging to the point where the two sides meet and intersect, and beyond this intersection the sides are infinitely prolonged or straight lines. And if you say...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1379 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1379. p. 421 Memoranda before 1500 (1379-l413).Find Longhi and tell him that you wait for him at Rome and will go with him to Naples; make you pay the donation 706 and take the book by Vitolone, and the measurements of the public buildings. Have two covered boxes made...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 256 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 256. If several objects in shadow, standing very close together, are seen against a bright background they will appear separated by wide intervals.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1520 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1520. On Tuesday I bought wine for morning [drinking]; on Friday the 4th day of September the same. 844 FOOTNOTES 456:844 : This note enables us to fix the date of the Manuscript, in which it is to be found. In 1495 the 4th of September fell on a Friday; the contents...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 802 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 802. When you have finished building up the man, you will make the statue with all its superficial measurements. 418 FOOTNOTES 112:418 : "Cresciere l'omo". The meaning of this expression appears to be different here and in the passage C.A. 157a, 468a (see No. 526, Note...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 56 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 391. p. 201 OF SMALL FOLDS IN DRAPERIES. How figures dressed in a cloak should not show the shape so much as that the cloak looks as if it were next the flesh; since you surely cannot wish the cloak to be next the flesh, for you must suppose that between the flesh...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 901 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 901. Answer to Maestro Andrea da Imola, who said that the solar rays reflected from a convex mirror are mingled and lost at a short distance; whereby it is altogether denied that the luminous side of the moon is of the nature of a mirror, and that consequently the light...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1484 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1484. p. 448 Roger Bacon, done in print. 822 FOOTNOTES 448:822 :The earliest printed edition known to Brunet of the works of Roger Bacon, is a French translation, which appeared about fourty years after Leonardo's death.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 984 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 984. p. 207 The authorities for the study of the structure of the earth.Since things are much more ancient than letters, it is no marvel if, in our day, no records exist of these seas having covered so many countries; and if, moreover, some records had existed, war...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1106 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1106. p. 267 WHY WATER IS FOUND AT THE TOP OF MOUNTAINS. From the straits of Gibraltar to the Don is 3500 miles, that is one mile and 1/6, giving a fall of one braccio in a mile to any water that moves gently. The Caspian sea is a great deal higher; and none...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 566 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 566. HOW WHITE BODIES SHOULD BE REPRESENTED. On the lighting of white objects. If you are representing a white body let it be surrounded by ample space, because as white has no colour of its own, it is tinged and altered in some degree by the colour of the objects...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 581 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 581. Of composing historical pictures. Of not considering the limbs in the figures in historical pictures; as many do who, in the wish to represent the whole of a figure, spoil their compositions. And when you place one figure behind another take care to draw the whole...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 58 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 423. OF THE SHADOWS OF A LEAF. The proportions of light and shade in a leaf (423-426).Sometimes a leaf has three accidents [of light] that is: shade, lustre [reflected light] and transparency [transmitted light]. Thus, if the light were at "n" as regards the leaf "s"...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1319 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1319. A FABLE. The lily set itself down by the shores of the Ticino, and the current carried away bank and the lily with it.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 726 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 726. MINT AT ROME. The mint of Rome.It can also be made without a spring. But the screw above must always be joined to the part of the movable sheath: [Margin note: The mint of Rome.] 347 p. 18 All coins which do not have the rim complete, are not to be accepted...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 963 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 963. Observations in support of the hypothesis (963-969). The waters circulate with constant motion from the utmost depths of the sea to the highest summits of the mountains, not obeying the nature of heavy matter; and in this case it acts as does the blood of animals...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1463 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1463. Saturday morning the 3rd of August 1504 Jacopo the German came to live with me in the house, and agreed with me that I should charge him a carlino a day.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1018 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1018. THE BATH. To heat the water for the stove of the Duchess take four parts of cold water to three parts of hot water. 544 FOOTNOTES 233:544 : "Duchessa di Milano", Beatrice d'Este, wife of Ludovico il Moro to whom she was married, in 1491. She died in June 1497.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 121 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 121. Shadow is the diminution alike of light and of darkness, and stands between darkness and light. A shadow may be infinitely dark, and also of infinite degrees of absence of darkness. The beginnings and ends of shadow lie between the light and darkness and may be...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 321. The nose will make a double square; that is the width of the nose at the nostrils goes twice into the length from the tip of the nose to the eyebrows. And, in the same way, in profile the distance from the extreme side of the nostril where it joins the cheek...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1006 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1006. They do not know why the Arno will never remain in a channel. It is because the rivers which flow into it deposit earth where they enter, and wear it away on the opposite side, bending the river in that direction. The Arno flows for 6 miles between la Capr...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 125 "IV." "PERSPECTIVE OF DISAPPEARANCE." "The theory of the Prospettiva de' perdimenti" would, in many important details, be quite unintelligible if it had not been led up by the principles of light and shade on which it is based. The word "Prospettiva"...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 31 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 33. When the eye, coming out of darkness suddenly sees a luminous body, it will appear much larger at first sight than after long looking at it. The illuminated object will look larger and more brilliant, when seen with two eyes than with only one. A luminous object...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 46 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 435. A classification of trees according to their colours.The trees in a landscape are of various kinds of green, inasmuch as some verge p. 220 towards blackness, as firs, pines, cypresses, laurels, box and the like. Some tend to yellow such as walnuts, and pears, vines...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 738 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 738. HOW TO PROCEED TO BREAK A LARGE MASS OF BRONZE. If you want to break up a large mass of bronze, first suspend it, and then make round it a wall on the four sides, like a trough of bricks, and make a great fire therein. When it is quite red hot give it a blow with...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1307 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1307. (Of Mules which have on them rich burdens of silver and gold.) Much treasure and great riches will be laid upon four-footed beasts, which will convey them to divers places.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 845 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 845. Our life is made by the death of others. In dead matter insensible life remains, which, reunited to the stomachs of living beings, resumes life, both sensual and intellectual.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 373. If a man, in taking a jump from firm ground, can leap 3 braccia, and when he was taking his leap it were to recede 1/3 of a braccio, that would be taken off his former leap; and so if it were thrust forward 1/3 of a braccio, by how much would his leap be increased?
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. D. Design : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 58 D. DESIGN FOR A MAUSOLEUM. Pl. XCVIII (P. V., 182. No. d'ordre 2386). In the midst of a hilly landscape rises an artificial mountain in the form of a gigantic cone, crowned by an imposing temple. At two thirds of the height a terrace is cut out with six doorways...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 485 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 485. PRECEPTS FOR DRAWING. The artist ought first to exercise his hand by copying drawings from the hand of a good master. And having acquired that practice, under the criticism of his master, he should next practise drawing objects in relief of a good style, following...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 125 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 125. WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A SHADOW THAT IS INSEPARABLE FROM A BODY AND A CAST SHADOW? An inseparable shadow is that which is never absent from the illuminated body. As, for instance a ball, which so long as it is in the light always has one side in shadow...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 979 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 979. p. 205 V. ON MOUNTAINS. The formation of mountains (979-983).Mountains are made by the currents of rivers. Mountains are destroyed by the currents of rivers. 518 FOOTNOTES 205:518 : Compare 789.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1479 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1479. Aristotle in Book 3 of the Ethics: Man merits praise or blame solely in such mat- ters as lie within his option to do or not to do.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1303 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1303. p. 369 (Of Walnut trees, that are beaten.) Those which have done best will be most beaten, and their offspring taken and flayed or peeled, and their bones broken or crushed. (Of Sculpture.) Alas! what do I see? The Saviour cru- cified anew. (Of the Mouth of M...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 35 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 29. Let the object in relief "t" be seen by both eyes; if you will look at the object with the right eye "m", keeping the left eye "n" shut, the object will appear, or fill up the space, at "a"; and if you shut the right eye and open the left, the object (will occupy...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 42 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 439. OF DEPICTING A FOREST SCENE. The trees and plants which are most thickly branched with slender branches ought to have less dark shadow than those trees and plants which, having broader leaves, will cast more shadow.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1002 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1002. From the wall of the Arno at [the gate of] la Giustizia to the bank of the Arno at Sardigna where the walls are, to the mills, is 7400 braccia, that is 2 miles and 1400 braccia and beyond the Arno is 5500 braccia. 534 FOOTNOTES 228:534 : 2. "Giustizia". By this...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 562 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 562. OF THE BACKGROUNDS FOR PAINTED FIGURES. On the lighting of the background (562-565).The ground which surrounds the forms of any object you paint should be darker than the high lights of those figures, and lighter than their shadowed part: &c
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 980 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 980. That the Northern bases of some Alps are not yet petrified. And this is plainly to be seen where the rivers, which cut through them, flow towards the North; where they cut through the strata in the living stone in the higher parts of the mountains; and, where they...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 905 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 905. OF THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. It has been asserted, that the spots on the moon result from the moon being of varying thinness or density; but if this were so, when there is an eclipse of the moon the solar rays would pierce through the portions which were thin as is...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1361. p. 414 S lorezo/// inbiadali/// inferri de/// in lorezo/// [inno abuil]// in acocatu/// per la sella //// colte di lor/// v cavallott/// el uiagg/// al/// a lurez/// in biada/// inferri/// abuss/// in viagg/// alorz/// 691 FOOTNOTES 414:691 : This seems to be...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 722 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 722. Believe me, Leonardo the Florentine, who has to do the equestrian bronze statue of the Duke Francesco that he does not need to care about it, because he has work for all his life time, and, being so great a work, I doubt whether he can ever finish it. 343 FOOTNOTES...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1135. Necessity is the mistress and guide of nature. Necessity is the theme and the inventress, the eternal curb and law of nature.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 621 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 621. p. 318 A FINE YELLOW. Dissolve realgar with one part of orpiment, with aqua fortis. WHITE. Put the white into an earthen pot, and lay it no thicker than a string, and let it stand in the sun undisturbed for 2 days; and in the morning when the sun has dried off...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1467 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1467. 1467 Gian Maria 4, Benedetto 4, Gian Pietro 3, Salai 3, Bartolomeo 3, Gherardo 4. p. 442 FOOTNOTES 441:1467 5. See No. 1465, 2.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 967 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 967. OF SPRINGS OF WATER ON THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. It is quite evident that the whole surface of the ocean--when there is no storm--is at an equal distance from the centre of the earth, and that the tops of the mountains are farther from this centre in proporti...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 585 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 585. HOW YOU SHOULD MAKE AN IMAGINARY ANIMAL LOOK NATURAL. !mOf representing imaginary animals. You know that you cannot invent animals without limbs, each of which, in itself, must resemble those of some other animal. Hence if you wish to make an animal, imagined by...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 181 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 181. A light which is smaller than the body it illuminates produces shadows of which the outlines end within [the surface of] the body, and not much compound shadow; and falls on less than half of it. A light which is larger than the body it illuminates, falls on more...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1114. Methods of staying and moving in waterHow an army ought to cross rivers by swimming with air-bags... How fishes swim 620 ; of the way in which they jump out of the water, as may be seen with dolphins; and it seems a wonderful thing to make a leap from a thing...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1041 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1041. Stairs of the [palace of the] Count of Urbino,--rough. 566 FOOTNOTES 241:566 : The text is accompanied by a slight sketch.
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 306. The surface of an object partakes of the colour of the light which illuminates it; and of the colour of the atmosphere which lies between the eye and that object, that is of the colour of the transparent medium lying between the object and the eye; and among...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1524 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1524. On Monday I bought 4 braccia of cloth lire 13 S 14 1/2 on the 17th of, October 1497.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 252 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 252. A luminous body will appear more brilliant in proportion as it is surrounded by deeper shadow. 116 FOOTNOTES 137:116 : The diagram which, in the original, is placed after this text, has no connection with it.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 52 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 339. p. 181 The opening of the ear, the joint of the shoulder, that of the hip and the ancle are in perpendicular lines; "a n" is equal to "m o". 161 FOOTNOTES 181:161 : See Pl. XVI, No. 2, the upper sketch.
Vol. Ii. Duplicate Plates. Note : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " The following plates, which apppeared in Vol. I, are referenced in Vol. II. They do not appear in the original book in this location.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 166 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 166. OF THE PYRAMIDAL SHADOW. The pyramidal shadow produced by a columnar body will be narrower than the body itself in proportion as the simple derived shadow is intersected farther from the body which casts it. 73 FOOTNOTES 94:73 166: Compare the first diagram to No...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 754 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 754. Here there cannot and ought not to be any "campanile"; on the contrary it must stand apart like that of the Cathedral and of San Giovanni at Florence, and of the Cathedral at Pisa, where the campanile is quite detached as well as the dome. Thus each can display its...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 2. Churches : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 52 2. CHURCHES FORMED ON THE PLAN OF A LATIN CROSS. We find among Leonardo's studies several sketches for churches on the plan of the Latin cross; we shall begin by describing them, and shall add a few observations. A. STUDIES AFTER EXISTING MONUMENTS. Pl. XCIV No. 2...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1384 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1384. p. 423 On the 16th day of July. Caterina came on 16th day of July, 1493. Messer Mariolo's Morel the Florentin, has a big horse with a fine neck and a beautiful head. The white stallion belonging to the falconer has fine hind quarters; it is behind the Com...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 293. ALL COLOURS ARE AT A DISTANCE UNDISTINGUISHABLE AND UNDISCERNIBLE. An experiment.All colours at a distance are undistinguishable in shadow, because an object which is not in the highest light is incapable of transmitting its image to the eye through an atmosphere...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1424 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1424. p. 430 The figures you will have to reserve for the last book on shadows that they may appear in the study of Gerardo the illuminator at San Marco at Florence. [Go to see Melzo, and the Ambassador, and Maestro Bernardo]. 747 FOOTNOTES 430:747 : L. 1-3 are...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 47 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1183. On riches (1183--1187).That is not riches, which may be lost; virtue is our true good and the true reward of its possessor. That cannot be lost; that never deserts us, but when life leaves us. As p. 296 to property and external riches, hold them with trembling;...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 45 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 45. 1, The superficies is a limitation of the body. 2, and the limitation of a body is no part of that body. 4, and the limitation of one body is that which begins another. 3, that which is not part of any body is nothing. Nothing is that which fills no space. If one...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1126. An object offers as much resistance to the air as the air does to the object. You may see that the beating of its wings against the air supports a heavy eagle in the highest and rarest atmosphere, close to the sphere of elemental fire. Again you may see the air...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 858 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 858. The earth is not in the centre of the Sun's orbit nor at the centre of the universe, but in the centre of its companion elements, and united with them. And any one standing on the moon, when it and the sun are both beneath us, would see this our earth...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 521 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 521. On various helps in preparing a picture (521-530).To draw a nude figure from nature, or any thing else, hold in your hand a plumb-line to enable you to judge of the relative position of objects.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 178 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 178. It can be proved why the shadow "o p c h" is darker in proportion as it is nearer to the line "p h" and is lighter in proportion as it is nearer to the line "o c". Let the light "a b", be a window, and let the dark wall in which this window is, be "b s", that is...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 818 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 818. p. 119 Procure the placenta of a calf when it is born and observe the form of the cotyledons, if their cotyledons are male or female.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1240 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1240. THE DRAGON. This creature entangles itself in the legs of the elephant which falls upon it, and so both die, and in its death it is avenged. THE VIPER. She, in pairing opens her mouth and at last clenches her teeth and kills her husband. Then the young ones...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. C. Studies : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 55 C. STUDIES FOR A FORM OF A CHURCH MOST PROPER FOR PREACHING. The problem as to what form of church might answer the requirements of acoustics seems to have engaged Leonardo's very particular attention. The designation of "teatro" given to some of these sketches...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1351. p. 407 Drafts of a letter to Giuliano de' Medici (1351-1352).[Most illustrious Lord. I greatly rejoice most Illustrious Lord at your...] I was so greatly rejoiced, most illustrious Lord, by the desired restoration of your health, that it almost had the effect th...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 537 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 537. OF THE WAY TO DRAW FIGURES FOR HISTORICAL PICTURES. The painter must always study on the wall on which he is to picture a story the height of the position where he wishes to arrange his figures; and when drawing his studies for them from nature he must place...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1256 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1256. of these, being killed with a spear by one who was on horse-back, and its venom flowing on the spear, not only the man but the horse also died. It spoils the wheat and not only that which it touches, but where it breathes the grass dries and the stones are split...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 663. p. 342 p. 343 On Madonna pictures.[In the autumn of] 1478 I began the two Madonna [pictures]. p. 344 299 FOOTNOTES 344:299 : Photographs of this page have been published by BRAUN, No. 439, and PHILPOT, No. 718. 1. "Incominciai". We have no other informati...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 06 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1355. This spirit returns to the brain whence it had departed, with a loud voice and with these words, it moved... And if any man though he may have wisdom or goodness......... 688 p. 412 O blessed and happy spirit whence comest thou? Well have I known this man, much...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1392 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1392. Messer Gian Domenico Mezzabarba and Messer Giovanni Franceso Mezzabarba. By the side of Messer Piero d'Anghiera.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1049 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1049. The fortress at Urbino. 570 FOOTNOTES 242:570 : 1049. In the original the text is written inside the sketch in the place here marked "n".
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 11 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 297. Take care that the perspective of colour does not disagree with the size of your objects, hat is to say: that the colours diminish from their natural [vividness] in proportion as the objects at various distances dimmish from their natural size.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1432 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1432. Ask the wife of Biagio Crivelli how the capon nurtures and hatches the eggs of the hen,--he being drunk.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 932 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 932. THE BEGINNING OF THE BOOK ON WATER. Sea is the name given to that water which is wide and deep, in which the waters have not much motion. 495 FOOTNOTES 181:495 : Only the beginning of this passage is here given, the remainder consists of definitions which have no...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 51 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1192. The man who does not restrain wantonness, allies himself with beasts. You can have no dominion greater or less than that over yourself. He who thinks little, errs much. It is easier to contend with evil at the first than at the last. No counsel is more loyal th...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 189 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 189. No cast shadow can produce the true image of the body which casts it on a vertical plane unless the centre of the light is equally distant from all the edges of that body.
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 10 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1122. On Flying machines (1122-1126).Man when flying must stand free from the waist upwards so as to be able to balance himself as he does in a boat so that the centre of gravity in himself and in the machine may counterbalance each other, and be shifted as necessity...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 53 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 53. PERSPECTIVE. Perspective comes in where judgment fails [as to the distance] in objects which diminish. The eye can never be a true judge for determining with exactitude how near one object is to another which is equal to it [in size], if the top of that other is...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 414. In the walnut tree the leaves which are distributed on the shoots of this year are further apart from each other and more numerous in proportion as the branch from which this shoot springs is a young one. And they are inserted more closely and less in number when...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 244 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 244. That portion of a body of uniform breadth which is against a lighter background will look narrower [than the rest]. "e" is a given object, itself dark and of uniform breadth; "a b" and "c d" are two backgrounds one darker than the other; "b c" is a bright...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1343. p. 399 There are here, my Lord, many gentlemen who will undertake this expense among them, if they are allowed to enjoy the use of admission to the waters, the mills, and the passage of vessels and when it is sold to them the price will be repaid to them by...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1532 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1532. To Salai 4 grossoni, and for one braccio of velvet, 5 lire, and 1/2; viz. 10 soldi for loops of silver; Salai 14 soldi for binding, the making of the cloak 25 soldi. 851 FOOTNOTES 459:851 : Compare No. 1523.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 671. p. 350 Il Moro with spectacles, and Envy depicted with False Report and Justice black for il Moro. Labour as having a branch of vine ["or" a screw] in her hand.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 44 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 349. p. 186 From the top of the shoulder to the point of the elbow is as far as from that point to the joints of the four fingers with the palm of the hand, and each is 2 faces. "a e" is equal to the palm of the hand, "r f" and "o g" are equal to half a head and each...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1248 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1248. When they cross rivers they send their young ones up against the stream of the water; thus, being set towards the fall, they break the united current of the water so that the current does not carry them away. The dragon flings itself under the elephant's body...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 810 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 810. Describe which muscles disappear in growing fat, and which become visible in growing lean. And observe that that part which on the surface of a fat person is most concave, when he grows lean becomes more prominent. Where the muscles separate one from another you...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 529 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 529. HOW THE MIRROR IS THE MASTER [AND GUIDE] OF PAINTERS. When you want to see if your picture corresponds throughout with the objects you have drawn from nature, take a mirror and look in that at the reflection of the real things, and compare the reflected image with...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 742 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 742. must be 300 braccia, each street receiving its light through the openings of the upper streets, and at each arch must be a winding stair on a circular plan because the corners of square ones are always fouled; they must be wide, and at the first vault there must be...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 197 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 197. A luminous body which is long and narrow in shape gives more confused outlines to the derived shadow than a spherical light, and this contradicts the proposition next following: A shadow will have its outlines more clearly defined in proportion as it is nearer...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1057 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1057. The Alps (1057-1062).At Monbracco, above Saluzzo,--a mile above the Certosa, at the foot of Monte Viso, there is a quarry of flakey stone, which is as white as Carrara marble, without a spot, and as hard as porphyry or even harder; of which my worthy gossip...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1141. p. 287 The soul can never be corrupted with the corruption of the body, but is in the body as it were the air which causes the sound of the organ, where when a pipe bursts, the wind would cease to have any good effect. 633 FOOTNOTES 287:633 : Compare No. 845.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 734 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 734. 2 ounces of plaster to a pound of metal;-- walnut, which makes it like the curve. 352 FOOTNOTES 20:352 : The second part of this is quite obscure.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 637 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 637. VARNISH [OR POWDER]. Mercury with Jupiter and Venus,--a paste made of these must be corrected by the mould (?) continuously, until Mercury separates itself entirely from Jupiter and Venus. 295 FOOTNOTES 322:295 : Here, and in No. 641 "Mercurio" seems to me...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1471 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1471. Map of Elephanta in India which Antonello Merciaio has from maestro Maffeo;--there for seven years the earth rises and for seven years it sinks;--Enquire at the stationers about Vitruvius.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 971 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 971. The tide in estuaries.Book 9, of the meeting of rivers and of their ebb and flow. The cause is the same in the sea, where it is caused by the straits of Gibraltar; and again it is caused by whirlpools. If two rivers meet together to form a straight line, and then...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 593 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 593. p. 296 Of appropriate gestures (593-600).A picture or representation of human figures, ought to be done in such a way as that the spectator may easily recognise, by means of their attitudes, the purpose in their minds. Thus, if you have to represent a man of noble...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 574 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 574. HOW TO KNOW WHICH SIDE OF AN OBJECT IS TO BE MORE OR LESS LUMINOUS THAN THE OTHER. Of the light on the face (574-576).Let "f" be the light, the head will be the object illuminated by it and that side of the head on which the rays fall most directly will be the most...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 996 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 996. On the motion of air (996--999).That the return eddies of wind at the mouth of certain valleys strike upon the waters and scoop them out in a great hollow, whirl the water into the air in the form of a column, and of the colour of a cloud. And I saw this thing...
Vol. I. Duplicate Plates. Note : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " The following plate, which apppeared in Vol. II is referenced in Vol. I. It does not appear in the original book in this location.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 317. From the top of the head to the bottom of the chin is 1/9, and from the roots of the hair to the chin is 1/9 of the distance from the roots of the hair to the ground. The greatest width of the face is equal to the p. 173 space between the mouth and the roots...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 913 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 913. Why the planets appear larger in the East than they do overhead, whereas the contrary should be the case, as they are 3500 miles nearer to us when in mid sky than when on the horizon. All the degrees of the elements, through which the images of the celestial bodies...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 629 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 629. OIL. The preparation of oils (629--634).Make some oil of mustard seed; and if you wish to make it with greater ease mix the ground seeds with linseed oil and put it all under the press. p. 320
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1315 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1315. p. 374 Fable of the tongue bitten by the teeth. The cedar puffed up with pride of its beauty, separated itself from the trees around it and in so doing it turned away towards the wind, which not being broken in its fury, flung it uprooted on the earth...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 2. The preparation of the MSS. for publication.When you put together the science of the motions of water, remember to include under each proposition its application and use, in order that this science may not be useless.-- 2 FOOTNOTES 11:2 : A comparatively small...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 54 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 427. p. 217 Of the transparency of leaves (427-429).The shadows in transparent leaves seen from the under side are the same shadows as there are on the right side of this leaf, they will show through to the underside together with lights, but the lustre [reflected...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 23 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 775. OF STONES WHICH DISJOIN THEMSELVES FROM THEIR MORTAR. Stones laid in regular courses from bottom to top and built up with an equal quantity of mortar settle equally throughout, when the moisture that made the mortar soft evaporates. By what is said above it is...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " VI. PERSPECTIVE OF COLOUR AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE Introduction 289. 290. 291. 292. 293. 294. 295. 296. 297. 298. 299. 300. 301. 302. 303. 304. 305. 306. 307.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1014 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1014. CANAL. Estimates and preparatory studies for canals (1014. 1015).The canal which may be 16 braccia wide at the bottom and 20 at the top, we may say is on the average 18 braccia wide, and if it is 4 braccia deep, at 4 dinari the square braccia; it will only cost...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 853 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 853. Medicine is the restoration of discordant elements; sickness is the discord of the elements infused into the living body.
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 329. The length of the foot from the end of the toes to the heel goes twice into that from the heel to the knee, that is where the leg bone [fibula] joins the thigh bone [femur].
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 493 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 493. OF THE LIFE OF THE PAINTER IN THE COUNTRY. The artist's private life and choice of company (493-494).A painter needs such mathematics as belong to painting. And the absence of all companions who are alienated from his studies; his brain must be easily impressed by...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1488 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1488. p. 449 Maestro Stefano Caponi, a physician, lives at the piscina, and has Euclid De Ponderibus.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 988 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 988. The marine shells were not produced away from the sea.As to those who say that shells existed for a long time and were born at a distance from the sea, from the nature of the place and of the cycles, which can influence a place to produce such creatures--to them it...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 133 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 133. OF THE HIGHEST LIGHTS WHICH TURN AND MOVE AS THE EYE MOVES WHICH SEES THE OBJECT. Suppose the body to be the round object figured here and let the light be at the point "a", and let the illuminated side of the object be "b c" and the eye at the point "d": I say...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1010 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1010. OF THE CANAL OF MARTESANA. By making the canal of Martesana the water of the Adda is greatly diminished by its distribution over many districts for the irrigation of the fields. A remedy for this p. 231 would be to make several little channels, since the water...
Vol. Ii. Xiii. Theoretical Writings On Architecture. Part 27 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " XIII. THEORETICAL WRITINGS ON ARCHITECTURE 770. 771. 772. 773. 774. 775. 776. 777. 778. 779. 780. 781. 782. 783. 784. 785. 786. 787. 788. 789. 790. 791. 792. 793. 794. 795. Remarks on the style of Leonardo's architecture
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 27 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 37. Experiment [showing] the dilatation and contraction of the pupil, from the motion of the sun and other luminaries. In proportion as the sky is darker the stars appear of larger size, and if you were to light up p. 24 the medium these stars would look smaller;...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 50 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 431. p. 218 If the light comes from "m" and the eye is at "n" the eye will see the colour of the leaves "a b" all affected by the colour of "m" --that is of the atmosphere; and "b c" will be seen from the under side as transparent, with a beautiful green colour verging...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 589 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 589. When selecting figures you should choose slender ones rather than lean and wooden ones.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1311 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1311. (Of drying Fodder.) Innumerable lives will be destroyed and innumerable vacant spaces will be made on the earth. (Of the Life of Men, who every year change their bodily substance.) Men, when dead, will pass through their own bowels.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 137 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 137. SHOWS HOW LIGHT FROM ANY SIDE CONVERGES TO ONE POINT. Experiments on the relation of light and shadow within a room (137--140).Although the balls "a b c" are lighted from one window, nevertheless, if you follow the lines of their shadows you will see they intersect...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 497 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 497. OF THE TIME FOR STUDYING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS. Winter evenings ought to be employed by young students in looking over the things prepared during the summer; that is, all the p. 250 drawings from the nude done in the summer should be brought together and a choice...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 909 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 909. On instruments for observing the moon (909. 910).If you want to prove why the moon appears larger than it is, when it reaches the horizon; take a lens which is highly convex on one surface and concave on the opposite, and place the concave side next the eye...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 333. The relative proportions of the torso and of the whole figure.The cubit is one fourth of the height of a man and is equal to the greatest width of the shoulders. From the joint of one shoulder to the other is two faces and is equal to the distance from the top...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 597 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 597. OF PAINTING. Of the nature of movements in man. Do not repeat the same gestures in the limbs of men unless you are compelled by the necessity of their action, as is shown in "a b". 277 FOOTNOTES 299:277 : See Pl. V, where part of the text is also reproduced...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 39 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 25. OF THE EYE. Focus of sight.If the eye is required to look at an object placed too near to it, it cannot judge of it well--as happens to a man who tries to see the tip of his nose. Hence, as a general rule, Nature teaches us that an object can never be seen perfectly...
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 730 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 730. STUCCO FOR MOULDING. Take of butter 6 parts, of wax 2 parts, and as much fine flour as when put with these 2 things melted, will make them as firm as wax or modelling clay. GLUE. Take mastic, distilled turpentine and white lead.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1148. Science, its principles and rules (1148--1161)Science is the observation of things possible, whether present or past; prescience is the knowledge of things which may come to pass, though but slowly.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 975 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 975. Whirlpools.Whirlpools, that is to say caverns; that is to say places left by precipitated waters.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1475 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1475. Archimedes gave the quadrature of a polygonal figure, but not of the circle. Hence Archimedes never squared any figure with curved sides. He squared the circle minus the smallest portion that the intellect can conceive, that is the smallest point visible. 818...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 917 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 917. p. 172 Describe the nature of Time as distinguished from the Geometrical definitions.
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 489 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 489. HOW IT IS NECESSARY TO A PAINTER THAT HE SHOULD KNOW THE INTRINSIC FORMS [STRUCTURE] OF MAN. The painter who is familiar with the nature of the sinews, muscles, and tendons, will know very well, in giving movement to a limb, how many and which sinews cause it;...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 381 "XXI." "LETTERS. PERSONAL RECORDS. DATED NOTES." When we consider how superficial and imperfect are the accounts of Leonardo's life written some time after his death by Vasari and others, any notes or letters which can throw more light on his personal...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 849 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 849. The waters return with constant motion from the lowest depths of the sea to the utmost height of the mountains, not obeying the nature of heavier bodies; and in this they resemble the blood of animated beings which always moves from the sea of the heart and flows...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 129 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 129. MEMORANDUM OF THINGS I REQUIRE TO HAVE GRANTED [AS AXIOMS] IN MY EXPLANATION OF PERSPECTIVE. I ask to have this much granted me--to assert that every ray passing through air of equal density throughout, travels in a straight line from its cause to the object...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1110 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1110. The Euphrates.If the river will turn to the rift farther on it will never return to its bed, as the Euphrates does, and this may do at Bologna the one who is disappointed for his rivers.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1492 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1492. p. 450 Lucretius in his third [book] 'De Rerum Natura'. The hands, nails and teeth were (165) the weapons of ancient man. They also use for a standard a bunch of grass tied to a pole (167). 827 FOOTNOTES 450:827 : Lucretius, de rerum natura libri VI were printed...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 992 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 992. Other problems (992-994).Why do we find the bones of great fishes and oysters and corals and various other shells and sea-snails on the high summits of mountains by the sea, just as we find them in low seas?
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 570 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 570. p. 286 OF PAINTING. The density of a body of smoke looks white below the horizon while above the horizon it is dark, even if the smoke is in itself of a uniform colour, this uniformity will vary according to the variety in the ground on which it is seen.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 174 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 174. THE FARTHER THE DERIVED SHADOW IS PROLONGED THE LIGHTER IT BECOMES. You will find that the proportion of the diameter of the derived shadow to that of the primary shadow will be the same as that between the darkness of the primary shadow and that of the derived...
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 240 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 240. p. 133 The effect of light or dark backgrounds on the apparent size of objects (240-250).A shadow will appear dark in proportion to the brilliancy of the light surrounding it and conversely it will be less conspicuous where it is seen against a darker background.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 814 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 814. p. 117 Physiological problems (814. 815).Of the cause of breathing, of the cause of the motion of the heart, of the cause of vomiting, of the cause of the descent of food from the stomach, of the cause of emptying the intestines. Of the cause of the movement...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 40 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 353. The principal movements of the hand are 10; that is forwards, backwards, to right and to left, in a circular motion, up or down, to close and to open, and to spread the fingers or to press them together.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1388 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1388. Work of... of the stable of Galeazzo; by the road of Brera 717 ; benefice of Stanghe 718 ; benefice of Porta Nuova; benefice of Monza; Indaco's mistake; give first the benefices; then the works; then ingratitude, indignity and lamentations. FOOTNOTES 423:717 4:...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 459. When the sun is covered by clouds, objects are less conspicuous, because there is little difference between the light and shade of the trees and of the buildings being illuminated by the brightness of the atmosphere which surrounds the objects in such a way th...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 49 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 49. The nature of the outline.The boundaries of bodies are the least of all things. The proposition is proved to be true, because the boundary of a thing is a surface, which is not part of the body contained within that surface; nor is it part of the air surrounding...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 193 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 193. As the derived shadow gets more distant from the primary shadow, the more the cast shadow differs from the primary shadow.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1428 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1428. The great bird will take its first flight;-- on the back of his great swan,--filling the universe with wonders; filling all writings with his fame and bringing eternal glory to his birthplace. 749 FOOTNOTES 430:749 : This seems to be a speculation about the flying...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 928 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 928. Of inequality in the concavity of a ship. 493 A book of the inequality in the curve of the sides of ships. A book of the inequality in the position of the tiller. A book of the inequality in the keel of ships. A book of various forms of apertures by which water...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1252 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1252. THE LION. This animal, which is so terrible, fears nothing more than the noise of empty carts, and likewise the crowing of cocks. And it is much terrified at the sight of one, and looks at its comb with a frightened aspect, and is strangely alarmed when its face...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1359. As I told you in past days, you know that I am without any.... Francesco d'Antonio. Bernardo di Maestro Jacopo.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1528 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1528. p. 459 On the day of October, 1508, I had 30 scudi; 13 I lent to Salai to make up his sister's dowry, and 17 I have left.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 13 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 667. CHRIST. Count Giovanni, the one with the Cardinal of Mortaro. 304 FOOTNOTES 347:304 : As this note is in the same small Manuscript as the passage here immediately preceding it, I may be justified in assuming that Leonardo meant to use the features of the pers...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 533 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 533. p. 267 HOW IN SMALL OBJECTS ERRORS ARE LESS EVIDENT THAN IN LARGE ONES. On the limitations of painting (533-535)In objects of minute size the extent of error is not so perceptible as in large ones; and the reason is that if this small object is a representati...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 57 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 57. How to measure the pyramid of vision.As regards the point in the eye; it is made more intelligible by this: If you look into the eye of another person you will see your own image. Now imagine 2 lines starting from your ears and going to the ears of that image which...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 14 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1118. On the gravity of water.If the weight of the sea bears on its bottom, a man, lying on that bottom and having l000 braccia of water on his back, would have enough to crush him.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 936 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 936. p. 183 Let the earth make whatever changes it may in its weight, the surface of the sphere of waters can never vary in its equal distance from the centre of the world.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1436 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1436. p. 432 MEMORARDUM. To make some provisions for my garden, --Giordano, "De Ponderibus" 753 ,--the peacemaker, the flow and ebb of the sea,--have two baggage trunks made, look to Beltraffio's 754 lathe and have taken the stone,--out leave the books belonging...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 55 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1201. Words which do not satisfy the ear of the hearer weary him or vex him, and the symptoms of this you will often see in such hearers in their frequent yawns; you therefore, who speak before men whose good will you desire, when you see such an excess of fatigue...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 15 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 301. Experience shows us that the air must have darkness beyond it and yet it appears blue. If you produce a small quantity of smoke from dry wood and the rays of the sun fall on this smoke, and if you then place behind the smoke a piece of black velvet on which the sun...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 54 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 336. --Top of the chin--hip--the insertion of the middle finger. The end of the calf of the leg on the inside of the thigh.--The end of the swelling of the shin bone of the leg. The smallest thickness of the leg goes 3 times into the thigh seen in front. 159 FOOTNOTES...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1258 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1258. THE ICHNEUMON. This animal is the mortal enemy of the asp. It is a native of Egypt and when it sees an asp near its place, it runs at once to the bed or mud of the Nile and with this makes itself muddy all over, then it dries p. 332 itself in the sun, smears...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 693. p. 359 Fame alone raises herself to Heaven, because virtuous things are in favour with God. Disgrace should be represented upside down, because all her deeds are contrary to God and tend to hell.
Vol. I. Iv. Perspective Of Disappearance. 254 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 254. Of several bodies, all equally large and equally distant, that which is most brightly illuminated will appear to the eye nearest and largest. 118 FOOTNOTES 137:118 : Here again the diagrams in the original have no connection with the text.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 08 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1353. Draft of letter written at Rome.This other hindered me in anatomy, blaming it before the Pope; and likewise at the hospital; and he has filled this whole Belvedere with workshops for mirrors; and he did the same thing in Maestro Giorgio's room. He said that he had...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1522 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1522. EXPENSES OF THE INTERMENT OF CATERINA. For the 3 Ibs of tapers 27 S For the bier 8 S A pall over the bier 12 S For bearing and placing the cross 4 S For bearing the body 8 S For 4 priests and 4 clerks 20 S Bell, book and sponge 2 S For the gravediggers 16 S...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 539 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 539. p. 270 PERSPECTIVE. You are asked, O Painter, why the figures you draw on a small scale according to the laws of perspective do not appear--notwithstanding the demonstration of distance--as large as real ones--their height being the same as in those painted...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 752 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 752. p. 35 The earth that is dug out from the cellars must be raised on one side so high as to make a terrace garden as high as the level of the hall; but between the earth of the terrace and the wall of the house, leave an interval in order that the damp may not spoil...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 160 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 160. SHADOW AND LIGHT. Different sorts of derived shadows (160-162).The forms of shadows are three: inasmuch as if the solid body which casts the shadow is equal (in size) to the light, the shadow resembles a column without any termination (in length). If the body is...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 187 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 187. HOW AND WHEN THE SURROUNDINGS IN SHADOW MINGLE THEIR DERIVED SHADOW WITH THE LIGHT DERIVED FROM THE LUMINOUS BODY. The derived shadow of the dark walls on each side of the bright light of the window are what mingle their various degrees of shade with the light...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 416. OF THE RAMIFICATIONS OF TREES AND THEIR FOLIAGE. The ramifications of any tree, such as the elm, are wide and slender after the manner of a hand with spread fingers, foreshortened. And these are seen in the distribution [thus]: the lower portions are seen...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1047 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1047. p. 242 Thus grapes are carried at Cesena. The number of the diggers of the ditches is [arranged] pyramidically. 569 FOOTNOTES 242:569 : A sketch, representing a hook to which two bunches of grapes are hanging, refers to these first two lines. Cesena is mentioned...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 527 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 527. p. 264 If you would to draw a cube in an angle of a wall, first draw the object in its own proper shape and raise it onto a vertical plane until it resembles the angle in which the said object is to be represented.
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 16 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1345. And if any other comission is given me by any... of the reward of my service. Because I am not [able] to be... things assigned because meanwhile they have... to them...... which they well may settle rather than I... not my art which I wish to change and... given...
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 07 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 699. Such as harm is when it hurts me not, is good which avails me not. 327 FOOTNOTES 360:327 : See Pl. LX, No. 2. Compare this sketch with that on Pl. LXII, No. 2. Below the two lines of the text there are two more lines: li gchi (giunchi) che ritg le paglucole...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1246 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1246. They are merciful, and know the dangers, and if one finds a man alone and lost, he kindly puts him back in the road he has missed, if he finds the footprints of the man before the man himself. It dreads betrayal, so it stops and blows, pointing it out to the other...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1382 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1382. Ask maestro Lodovico for 'the conduits of water'. 712 FOOTNOTES 422:712 : Condotti d'acqua. Possibly a book, a MS. or a map.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1059 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1059. The river Arve, a quarter of a mile from Geneva in Savoy, where the fair is held on midsummerday in the village of Saint Gervais. 577 FOOTNOTES 245:577 : An indistinct sketch is to be seen by the text.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 41 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1176. Just as eating against one's will is injurious to health, so study without a liking for it spoils the memory, and it retains nothing it takes in.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 199 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 199. p. 111 OF THE OPINION OF SOME THAT A TRIANGLE CASTS NO SHADOW ON A PLANE SURFACE. A disputed proposition.Certain mathematicians have maintained that a triangle, of which the base is turned to the light, casts no shadow on a plane; and this they prove by saying th...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1422 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1422. Of the three regular bodies as opposed to some commentators who disparage the Ancients, who were the originators of grammar and the sciences and...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 922 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 922. First write of all water, in each of its motions; then describe all its bottoms and their various materials, always referring to the propositions concerning the said waters; and let the order be good, for otherwise the work will be confused. Describe all the forms...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 19 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 404. The tips of the boughs of plants [and trees], unless they are borne down by the weight of their fruits, turn towards the sky as much as possible. The upper side of their leaves is turned towards the sky that it may receive the nourishment of the dew which falls...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1305 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1305. (Of Crucifixes which are sold.) I see Christ sold and crucified afresh, and his Saints suffering Martyrdom. (Of Physicians, who live by sickness.) Men will come into so wretched a plight that they will be glad that others will derive profit from their sufferings...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 639 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 639. p. 323 Salt may be made from human excrement burnt and calcined and made into lees, and dried by a slow fire, and all dung in like manner yields salt, and these salts when distilled are very pungent.
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 44 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 437. OF THE SHADOWS OF VERDURE. The shadows of verdure are always somewhat blue, and so is every shadow of every object; and they assume this hue more in proportion as they are remote from the eye, and less in proportion as they are nearer. p. 221 The leaves which...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 33 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 31. p. 22 Every object we see will appear larger at midnight than at midday, and larger in the morning than at midday. This happens because the pupil of the eye is much smaller at midday than at any other time.
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1004 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1004. The wall of the old houses runs towards the gate of San Nicolo. 535 FOOTNOTES 228:535 : By the side of this text there is an indistinct sketch, resembling that given under No.973. On the bank is written the word "Casace". There then follows in the original...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1561 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1561. Egidius Romanus on the formation of the human body in the mother's womb 862 . 863 I believe to be the signature of Charles d'Amboise the Governor of Milan. If this explanation is the right one, it can be easily explained by the contents of Nos. 1350 and 1529...
Vol. I. Title Page : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " Plate I THE NOTEBOOKS OF LEONARDO DA VINCI ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED AS THE LITERARY WORKS OF LEONARDO DA VINCI TRANSLATED BY JEAN PAUL RICHTER VOLUME 1 [1883] These files are based on material produced for Project Gutenberg by Distributed Proofing. Additional scanning...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 17 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 319. Proportions of the head seen in front (319-321)."a n o f" are equal to the mouth. "a c" and "a f" are equal to the space between one eye and the other. "n m o f q r" are equal to half the width of the eye lids, that is from the inner [lachrymatory] corner...
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 843 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 843. HOW THE BODY OF ANIMALS IS CONSTANTLY DYING AND BEING RENEWED. The laws of nutrition and the support of life (843-848).The body of any thing whatever that takes nourishment constantly dies and is constantly renewed; because nourishment p. 130 can only enter...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 483 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 483. The course of instruction for an artist (483-485).The youth should first learn perspective, then the proportions of objects. Then he may copy from some good master, to accustom himself to fine forms. Then from nature, to confirm by practice the rules he has learnt...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 123 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 123. p. 74 Of the various kinds of shadows. (123-125).Darkness is absence of light. Shadow is diminution of light. Primitive shadow is that which is inseparable from a body not in the light. Derived shadow is that which is disengaged from a body in shadow and pervades...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1498 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1498. I have found in a history of the Spaniards that in their wars with the English Archimedes of Syracuse who at that time was living at the court of Ecliderides, King of the Cirodastri. And in maritime warfare he ordered that the ships should have tall masts...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 998 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 998. OF MOTION. I ask whether the true motion of the clouds can be known by the motion of their shadows; and in like manner of the motion of the sun.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1461 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1461. On the 23rd day of August, 12 lire from Pulisona. On the 14th of March 1494, Galeazzo came to live with me, agreeing to pay 5 lire a month for his cost paying on the l4th day of each month. His father gave me 2 Rhenish florins. On the l4th of July, I had...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 961 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 961. p. 196 III. SUBTERRANEAN WATER COURSES. Theory of the circulation of the waters (961. 962).Very large rivers flow under ground.
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 02 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1137. Weight, force and casual impulse, together with resistance, are the four external powers in which all the visible actions of mortals have their being and their end.
Vol. Ii. Xi. The Notes On Sculpture. 724 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 724. During ten years the works on the marbles have been going on I will not wait for my payment beyond the time, when my works are finished. 345 FOOTNOTES 15:345 : This possibly refers to the works for the pedestal of the equestrian statue concerning which we have no...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 583 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 583. Old men ought to be represented with slow and heavy movements, their legs bent at the knees, when they stand still, and their feet placed parallel and apart; bending low with the head leaning forward, and their arms but little extended. Women must be represented...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 564 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 564. p. 283 A most important part of painting consists in the backgrounds of the objects represented; against these backgrounds the outlines of those natural objects which are convex are always visible, and also the forms of these bodies against the background, even...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 986 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 986. A DOUBTFUL POINT. Doubts about the deluge.Here a doubt arises, and that is: whether the deluge, which happened at the time of Noah, was universal or not. And it would p. 209 seem not, for the reasons now to be given: We have it in the Bible that this deluge lasted...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1486 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1486. CORNELIUS CELSUS. The highest good is wisdom, the chief evil is suffering in the body. Because, as we are composed of two things, that is soul and body, of which the first is the better, the body is the inferior; wisdom belongs to the better part, and the chief...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1104 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1104. The Caspian Sea (1105. 1106).From the shore of the Southern coast of Cilicia may be seen to the South the beautiful island of Cyprus, which was the realm of the goddess Venus, and many navigators being attracted by her beauty, had their ships and rigging broken...
Vol. I. Vii. On The Proportions . Part 09 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 327. The whole length of the foot will lie between the elbow and the wrist and between the elbow and the inner angle of the arm p. 177 towards the breast when the arm is folded. The foot is as long as the whole head of a man, that is from under the chin to the topmost...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 1. Churches : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " p. 41 1. CHURCHES FORMED ON THE PLAN OF A GREEK CROSS. GROUP I. DOMES RISING FROM A CIRCULAR BASE. The simplest type of central building is a circular edifice. Pl. LXXXIV, No. 9. Plan of a circular building surrounded by a colonnade. Pl. LXXXIV, No. 8. Elevati...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 903 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 903. THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. On the spots in the moon (903-907).Some have said that vapours rise from the moon, after the manner of clouds and are interposed between the moon and our eyes. But, if this were the case, these spots would never be permanent, either...
Vol. I. I. Prolegomena And General Introducti. Part 29 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 35. ON PAINTING. If the eye, when [out of doors] in the luminous atmosphere, sees a place in shadow, this will look very much darker than it really is. This happens only because the eye when out in the air contracts the pupil in proportion p. 23 as the atmosphere...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 587 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 587. OF THE SELECTION OF BEAUTIFUL FACES. It seems to me to be no small charm in a painter when he gives his figures a p. 294 pleasing air, and this grace, if he have it not by nature, he may acquire by incidental study in this way: Look about you and take the best...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 965 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 965. It is the property of water that it constitutes the vital human of this arid earth; and the cause which moves it through its ramified veins, against the natural course of heavy matters, is the same property which moves the humours in every species of animal body...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1465 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1465. p. 441 I left Milan for Rome on the 24th day of September, 1513, with Giovanni 793 , Francesco di Melzi 794 795 FOOTNOTES 441:793 : 1465. 2. "Giovan;" it is not likely that Leonardo should have called Giovan' Antonio Beltraffio at one time Giovanni, as in this...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 499 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 499. Nor is the painter praiseworthy who does but one thing well, as the nude figure, heads, draperies, animals, landscapes or other such details, irrespective of other work; for there can be no mind so inept, that after devoting itself to one single thing and doing it...
Vol. Ii. Xv. Astronomy. 907 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 907. How the spots on the moon must have varied from what they formerly were, by reason of the course of its waters.
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 40 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " X. STUDIES AND SKETCHES FOR PICTURES AND DECORATIONS Introduction 663. 664. 665. 666. 667. 668. 669. 670. 671. 672. 673. 674. 675. 676. 677. 678. 679. 680. 681. 682. 683. 684. 685. 686. 687. 688. 689. 690. 691. 692. 693. 694. 695. 696. 697. 698. 699. 700. 701. 702. 703...
Vol. Ii. Xvii. Topographical Notes. 1100 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1100. SMALL BOATS. The small boats used by the Assyrians were made of thin laths of willow plaited over rods also of willow, and bent into the form of a boat. They were daubed with fine mud soaked with oil or with turpentine, and reduced to a kind of mud which resisted...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1482 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1482. Avicenna will have it that soul gives birth to soul as body to body, and each member to itself. 821 FOOTNOTES 447:821 : Avicenna, see too No. 1421, 1. 2.
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 982 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 982. In every concavity at the summit of the mountains we shall always find the divisions of the strata in the rocks.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 139 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 139. p. 83 Every shadow with all its variations, which becomes larger as its distance from the object is greater, has its external lines intersecting in the middle, between the light and the object. This proposition is very evident and is confirmed by experience...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 560 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 560. ON PAINTING. The juxtaposition of light and shade (560, 561).The comparison of the various qualities of shadows and lights not infrequently seems ambiguous and confused to the painter who desires to imitate and copy the objects he sees. The reason is this: If you...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 599 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 599. OF PAINTING. Make your work carry out your purpose and meaning. That is when you draw a figure consider well who it is and what you wish it to be doing. p. 300 OF PAINTING. With regard to any action which you give in a picture to an old man or to a young one, you...
Vol. I. Viii. Botany For Painters And Elements. Part 40 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 441. The distribution of light and shade with reference to the position of the spectator (441-443).The shadows of trees placed in a landscape do not display themselves in the same position in the trees on the right hand and those on the left; still more so if the sun is...
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1301 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1301. Feathers will raise men, as they do birds, towards heaven (that is, by the letters which are written with quills.) The works of men's hands will occasion their death. (Swords and Spears.) Men out of fear will cling to the thing they most fear. (That is they will...
Vol. Ii. Xix. Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Part 18 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1146. Every action needs to be prompted by a motive. To know and to will are two operations of the human mind. Discerning, judging, deliberating are acts of the human mind.
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 127 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 127. How there are 2 different kinds of light; one being called diffused, the other restricted. The diffused is that which freely illuminates objects. The restricted is that which being admitted through an opening or window illuminates them on that side only. 55...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. Part 02 : "THE DA VINCI NOTEBOOKS " III. SIX BOOKS ON LIGHT AND SHADE Introduction 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120. 121. 122. 123. 124. 125. 126. 127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136. 137. 138. 139. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144. 145. 146. 147. 148. 149. 150. 151. 152. 153. 154...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 487 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 487. It is better to imitate [copy] the antique than modern work. 233 FOOTNOTES 244:233 486, 487: These are the only two passages in which Leonardo alludes to the importance of antique art in the training of an artist. The question asked in No. 486 remains unanswered by...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1565 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1565. p. 468 864 FOOTNOTES 468:864 : A facsimile of this note, which refers to a well known book by St. Augustin, is given on page 254.
Vol. Ii. Xiv. Anatomy, Zoology And Physiology. 847 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 847. Man and animals are really the passage and the conduit of food, the sepulchre of animals and resting place of the dead, one causing the death of the other, making themselves the covering for the corruption of other dead [bodies].
Vol. I. X. Studies And Sketches For Pictures. Part 03 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 677. Envy must be represented with a contemptuous motion of the hand towards heaven, because if she could she would use her strength against God; make her with her face covered by a mask of fair seeming; show her as wounded in the eye by a palm branch and by...
Vol. Ii. Xxi. Letters. Personal Records. Part 12 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1349. Draft of Letter to the Governor of Milan.I am afraid lest the small return I have made for the great benefits, I have received from your Excellency, have not made you p. 404 somewhat angry with me, and that this is why to so many letters which I have written...
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1538 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1538. The moneys I have had from Ser Matteo; first 20 grassoni, then on 13 occasions 3 f. and then 61 grassoni, then 3, and then 3 * 3; 46 soldi 12 grossoni.
Vol. Ii. Xx. Humorous Writings. 1242 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1242. THE CATERPILLAR.--FOR VIRTUE IN GENERAL. The caterpillar, which by means of assiduous care is able to weave round itself a new dwelling place with marvellous artifice and fine workmanship, comes out of it afterwards with painted and lovely wings, with which it...
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 748 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 748. The Palace of the prince must have a piazza in front of it. Houses intended for dancing or any kind of jumping or any other movements with a multitude of people, must be on the ground- floor; for I have already witnessed the destruction of some, causing death...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 523 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 523. OF A MODE OF DRAWING A PLACE ACCURATELY. Have a piece of glass as large as a half sheet of royal folio paper and set thus firmly in front of your eyes that is, between your eye and the thing you want to draw; then place yourself at a distance of 2/3 of a bracci...
Vol. I. Ii. Linear Perspective. 47 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 47. DEFINITION OF THE NATURE OF THE LINE. Of the line (47-48).The line has in itself neither matter nor substance and may rather be called an imaginary idea than a real object; and this being its nature it occupies no space. Therefore p. 29 an infinite number of lines...
Vol. Ii. Xviii. Naval Warfare. Mechanical. Part 04 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1128. GREEK FIRE. Of Greek fire.Take charcoal of willow, and saltpetre, and sulphuric acid, and sulphur, and pitch, with frankincense and camphor, and Ethiopian wool, and boil them all together. This p. 281 fire is so ready to burn that it clings to the timbers even...
Vol. Ii. Xvi. Physical Geography. 926 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 926. p. 177 A book of the ordering of rivers so as to preserve their banks. A book of the mountains, which would stand forth and become land, if our hemisphere were to be uncovered by the water. A book of the earth carried down by the waters to fill up the great abyss...
Vol. I. Ix. The Practice Of Painting. 660 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 660. THAT PAINTING DECLINES AND DETERIORATES FROM AGE TO AGE, WHEN PAINTERS HAVE NO OTHER STANDARD THAN PAINTING ALREADY DONE. On the history of painting (660. 661).Hence the painter will produce pictures of small merit if he takes for his standard the pictures...
Vol. I. Vi. Perspective Of Colour And Aerial. Part 05 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 303. A dark object will appear bluest in proportion as it has a greater mass of luminous atmosphere between it and the eye. As may be seen in the colour of the sky.
Vol. Ii. Xxii. Miscellaneous Notes. 1386 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 1386. Maestro Giuliano da Marliano has a fine herbal. He lives opposite to Strami the Carpenters. 716 FOOTNOTES 423:716 : Compare No. 616, note. 4. legnamiere (milanese dialect) = legnajuolo.
Vol. Ii. Xii. Architectural Designs. 756 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 756. This edifice is inhabited [accessible] below and above, like San Sepolcro, and it is the same above as below, except that the upper story has the dome "c d"; and the 376 p. 51 lower has the dome "a b", and when you enter into the crypt, you descend 10 steps...
Vol. I. Iii. Six Books On Light And Shade. 164 : * "The Da Vinci Notebooks " 164. HOW A CAST SHADOW CAN NEVER BE OF THE SAME SIZE AS THE BODY THAT CASTS IT. If the rays of light proceed, as experience shows, from a single point and are diffused in a sphere round this point, radiating and dispersed through the air, the farther they spread...
